Digital PDFs

EK-CMIV6-RM-005

December 1988

412 pages

Original

8.3MB

Document:	Networks Communications Communications Options Minireference Manual Volume 6 Ethernet Devices (Part 2)
Order Number:	EK-CMIV6-RM
Revision:	005
Pages:	412
Original Filename:

OCR Text

EK-CMIV6-RM-005

Networks • Communications

Communications Options
Minireference Manual
Volume 6

Ethernet Devices (Part 2)

DIGITAL INTERNAL USE ONLY

Digital Equipment Corporation

1st Edition, December 1981
2nd Edition, August 1984
3rd Edition, August 1986
4th Edition, August 1987
5th Edition, August 1988

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

Printed in U. S.A.

This document was set on a DIGITAL DEeset Integrated Publishing
System.
•

Class A Computing Devices:

Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy.
The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A computing device pursuant to SubpartJ of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own
expense may be required to take measures to correct the interference.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

mamaomo™
DEC
DECmate
DEC set
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20

DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL
MASSBUS
PDP
PIOS
Professional
Rainbow

RSTS
RSX
Scholar
ULTRIX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

CONTENTS
Page
DEFfR BROADBAND ETHERNET FREQUENCY TRANSLA1OR ...... DEFTR-l
General Description .................................................................................... DEFTR-l
DEFTR Versions ........................................................................................ DEFTR-2
Components ................................................................................................ DEFTR-3
Country Kits .............................................................................................. DEFTR-4
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DEFTR-4
Device Placement ....................................................................................... DEFTR-5
Power Requirements ................................................................................... DEFTR-6
Preinstallation Steps ................................................................................... DEFTR-6
Attenuator Settings .................................................................................... DEFTR-6
Input (Reverse Channel) Attenuator Value Determination ................... DEFTR-7
Output (Forward Channel) Attenuator Value Determination ................ DEFTR-7
Installation Flow Diagram .......................................................................... DEFTR-8
Cable Length Restriction ......................................................................... DEFTR-13
Diagnostics ............................................................................................... DEFTR-14
Prechecks ................................................................................................. DEFTR -15
Ethernet Controller Self-Test ................................................................... DEFTR-15
Network Troubleshooting Table ............................................................... DEFTR-15
DEFTR Checkout Flow Diagram ............................................................ DEFTR-17
DEFTR End-to-End Test. ........................................................................ DEFTR-20
Required Test Equipment ................................................................... DEFTR-20
Test Procedure .................................................................................... DEFTR-20
DELNI LOCAL NETWORK INTERCONNECT ....................................... DELNI-l
General Description ..................................................................................... DELNI-l
DELNI Configurations ............................................................................... DELNI-2
Modes of Operation .................................................................................... DELNI-4
Physical Description .................................................................................... DELNI-5
Environmental Requirements ...................................................................... DELNI-5
Reference Documentation ........................................................................... DELNI-6
DELNI Versions ......................................................................................... DELNI-6
DELNI Hardware Components ................................................................... DELNI-6
Country Kits ............................................................................................ '" DELNI-7
System Placement ....................................................................................... DELNI-7
Power Requirements .................................................................................... DELNI-7
Required Equipment ................................................................................... DELNI-8
Installation Flow Diagram ........................................................................... DELNI-8
Voltage and Mode Selection ...................................................................... DELNI-ll
Cable Length Restrictions ......................................................................... DELNI-12
Cable Connections ..................................................................................... DELNI-15
Diagnostics ................................................................................................ DELNI-16
DELNI Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) .................................................. DELNI-17
Troubleshooting Equipment. ...................................................................... DELNI-17
Troubleshooting Tips ................................................................................. DELNI-17
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram ................................................................. DELNI-l8
Typical H4000-Tx Tester Configurations ................................................. DELNI-25
DELNI Tech Tips/FCO Index ................................................................. DELNI-27

iii

CONTENTS (Coot)
Page
DELUA ETHERNET UNIBUS ADAPTOR .............................................. DELUA-1
General Description .................................................................................... DELUA-1
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DELUA-1
DELUA Adaptor Components List ........................................................... DELUA-1
Device Placement ....................................................................................... DELUA-2
Installation Procedure ................................................................................. DELUA-2
Installation Verification ............................................................................ DELUA-1 0
Cabling ..................................................................................................... DELUA-14
DELUA Diagnostics ................................................................................ DELUA-15
Maintenance Features .............................................................................. DELUA-15
Self-Test Procedures ................................................................................. DELUA-15
Diagnostic Description ............................................................................. DELUA-18
EVDYB VAX-lIOn-Line Functional Diagnostic ................................... DELUA-18
CZAUD PDP-II Functional Diagnostic .................................................. DELUA-19
EVDWC/CZUAC Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) .................... DELUA-21
CXUAD DEC/XII DELUA Module .................................................... DELUA-21
Troubleshooting Flowchart ....................................................................... DELUA-22
DELUA Tech Tips/FCO Index .............................................................. DELUA-24
DEMPR MULTIPORT REPEATER .......................................................... DEMPR-1
General Description ................................................................................... DEMPR-1
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DEMPR-1
ThinWire and Standard Ethernet Differences .......................................... DEMPR-1
Repeater Configuration Limitations .......................................................... DEMPR-2
Standalone DEMPR ............................................................................ DEMPR-2
Standalone Cascading DEMPR ........................................................... DEMPR-3
Standalone DELNI with DEMPR Multiport Repeaters ..................... DEMPR-4
DEMPR on a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable ................................ DEMPR-5
DEMPR/DELNI Pyramids on a Standard Ethernet Coaxial
Segment ............................................................................................... DEMPR-6
DEMPR Component List ......................................................................... DEMPR-8
System Placement ................................................................................... DEMPR-10
Power Requirements ................................................................................ DEMPR-10
Physical Specifications ............................................................................ DEMPR-10
Environmental Specifications .................................................................. DEMPR-11
Preinstallation Considerations .................................................................. DEMPR-11
Installation Flow Diagram ....................................................................... DEMPR-12
Cable Connections ................................................................................... DEMPR-17
ThinWire Cabling ................................................................................... DEMPR-18
ThinWire Coaxial Cable Segment Cabling Guidelines ........................... DEMPR-19
Diagnostics .............................................................................................. DEMPR-20
DEMPR Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) .............................................. DEMPR-22
Equipment Required ............................................................................... DEMPR-22
Optional Equipment ................................................................................ DEMPR-22
Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................... DEMPR-22

CONTENTS (Coot)
Page

DEMWA ETHERNET MICROWAVE ADAPTER .................................. DEMWA-l
General Description .................................................................................. DEMWA-l
DEMWA Configurations ......................................................................... DEMWA-l
Reference Documentation ........................................................................ DEMWA-2
METROWAVE Bridge Terminology ........................................................ DEMWA-2
DEMWB Versions .................................................................................... DEMWA-2
Installing the DEMWA Microwave Adapter in the SER Rack .............. DEMWA-3
Connecting the DEMWA Adapter .......................................................... DEMWA-4
Installing the Microwave Equipment.. ...................................................... DEMWA-4
DEMWA Installation Verification Procedure (lVP) ................................ DEMWA-5
METROWAVE Bridge Troubleshooting .................................................. DEMWA-7
DEPCA PERSONAL COMPUTER BUS ADAPTER ............................... DEPCA-l
General Description .................................................................................... DEPCA-l
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DEPCA-l
DEPCA Configuration ............................................................................... DEPCA-2
Versions ...................................................................................................... DEPCA-3
Jumper Settings ......................................................................................... DEPCA-4
Interrupt Request Jumpers ........................................................................ DEPCA-6
DEPCA System Requirements .................................................................. DEPCA-8
Power Requirements ................................................................................... DEPCA-8
Identifying System BIOS ROM Revision Date ......................................... DEPCA-8
ROM Revision Date ................................................................................... DEPCA-8
Running the PC-DOS DEBUG Program ............................................. DEPCA-9
Running the BASIC ROM Revision Date Program ............................. DEPCA-9
Installation Flow Diagram ........................................................................ DEPCA-l 0
Cabling ..................................................................................................... DEPCA-12
DEPCA Diagnostics ................................................................................ DEPCA-13
DEPCA Self-Test .................................................................................... DEPCA-l3
Preparing to Run the Service Diagnostics ............................................... DEPCA-14
Starting the Diagnostic Program ............................................................. DEPCA-15
Troubleshooting Sequence ........................................................................ DEPCA-18
Troubleshooting Procedures ...................................................................... DEPCA-18
No Response at Power-up ................................................................... DEPCA-18
Troubleshooting Flowchart .................................................................. DEPCA-21
Checking the DEPCA ThinWire LAN Cable Connection ................. DEPCA-23
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Spares ............................................ DEPCA-24
Required Tools ......................................................................................... DEPCA-24
DEQNA Q-BUS DATA COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER ............. DEQNA-l
General Description ................................................................................... DEQNA-l
Features ..................................................................................................... DEQNA-2
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DEQNA-2
Hardware Components .............................................................................. DEQNA-3
Software Components ................................................................................ DEQNA-3
Bus Latency Constraints ........................................................................... DEQNA-3
Loading Requirements ............................................................................... DEQNA-4
Power Requirements .................................................................................. DEQNA-4

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page
Jumpers ..................................................................................................... DEQNA-5
Installation Flow Diagram ......................................................................... DEQNA-6
Post-Installation Power Checks ............................................................... DEQNA-l 0
Light Emitting Diode (LED) Checks ..................................................... DEQNA-I0
Diagnostic Acceptance Procedure ........................................................... DEQNA-ll
Cabling .................................................................................................... DEQNA-12
DEQNA Diagnostics .............................................................................. DEQNA-13
Extended Primary Bootstrap (EPB) ....................................................... DEQNA-13
Citizenship Test (CQ) ............................................................................. DEQNA-14
Successful Test Results ...................................................................... DEQNA-16
Failed Test Results ............................................................................. DEQNA-16
Field Functional Test (ZQNA) ............................................................... DEQNA-20
Configuration and Set-Up .................................................................. DEQNA-20
Functional Areas Tested .................................................................... DEQNA-20
Hardware Tested ................................................................................ DEQNA-21
Operation ........................................................................................... DEQNA-23
Start-Up Procedure (XXDP+) ........................................................... DEQNA-23
Hardware Questions ........................................................................... DEQNA-23
Software Questions............................................................................. DEQNA-23
Error Reporting .................................................................................. DEQNA-25
DEQNA DEC/X 11 Exerciser (XQNA) ................................................ DEQNA-27
Configuration and Set-Up .................................................................. DEQNA-27
Commands ......................................................................................... DEQNA-28
Error Messages ................................................................................... DEQNA-29
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ........................................ ;.................... DEQNA-30
Corrective Maintenance .......................................................................... DEQNA-30
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... DEQNA-31
DEQNA Tech Tips/FCO Index ............................................................. DEQNA-35
DEREP ETHERNET REPEATER ............................................................. DEREP-l
General Description ....... , ............................................................................ DEREP-l
DEREP Versions ........................................................................................ DEREP-l
DEREP Configuration Considerations ....................................................... DEREP-3
DEREP Components ................................................................................. DEREP-6
Country Kits .............................................................................................. DEREP-6
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DEREP-7
Local and Remote Device Placement ........................................................ DEREP-8
Power Requirements ................................................................................. DEREP-l 0
Preinstallation Steps ................................................................................. DEREP-l 0
Installation Flow Diagrams ...................................................................... DEREP-ll
Cabling ..................................................................................................... DEREP-26
Diagnostics ............................................................................................... DEREP-27
Maintenance Aids .................................................................................... DEREP-29
Equipment Required ........................................................................... DEREP-29
Optional Equipment ............................................................................ DEREP-29
Preventive Maintenance ...................................................................... DEREP-29
Field Replaceable Units ...................................................................... DEREP-29
DEREP Tech Tips/FCO Index ............................................................... DEREP-46

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

DESNC ETHERNET CONTROLLER ....................................................... DESNC-l
General Description .................................................................................... DESNC-l
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DESNC-2
DESNC Modes of Operation ..................................................................... DESNC-2
DESNC Configuration Considerations ....................................................... DESNC-3
Power Requirements ................................................................................... DESNC-4
Device Placement ....................................................................................... DESNC-4
Installation Procedure ................................................................................. DESNC-4
Updating the VAX KDC Database ........................................................... DESNC-6
Cabling ....................................................................................................... DESNC-7
Power-Up Self-Test .................................................................................... DESNC-8
ThinWire Port Check .............................................................................. DESNC-IO
DESNC/VAX KDC Troubleshooting Flowchart. .................................... DESNC-14
DESNC LED Indicators .......................................................................... DESNC-17
VAX KDC Testing .................................................................................. DESNC-l9
VAX KDC Commands and Qualifiers .................................................... DESNC-23
DESNC Keyboard Commands ................................................................ DESNC-26
DESPR SINGLE-PORT REPEATER ......................................................... DESPR-l
General Description .................................................................................... DESPR-l
DESTA STATION ADAPTER ..................................................................... DESTA-l
General Description .................................................................................... DESTA-l
ThinWire Coaxial Segment Cabling Guidelines ........................................ DESTA-l
FCC and Grounding Requirements ............................................................ DESTA-4
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DESTA-5
Power Requirements ................................................................................... DESTA-6
Physical Specifications ............................................................................... DESTA-6
Environmental Specifications ..................................................................... DESTA-6
Preinstallation Considerations ..................................................................... DESTA-6
Hardware Requirements ............................................................................. DESTA-7
Heartbeat Selection .................................................................................... DESTA-7
Installation Flow Diagram .......................................................................... DESTA-8
Installation Verification .............................................................................. DESTA-9
Cabling ..................................................................................................... DESTA-IO
Diagnostics ............................................................................................... DESTA-ll
Maintenance Aids .................................................................................... DESTA-12
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) .............................................................. DESTA-12
Cable Testing ........................................................................................... DESTA-13

vii

QUICK REFERENCE CHECK
Use this quick reference as a resource to identify the major sections in the 7 volumes of the Communications Options
Minirejerence Manual

VOLUME 1 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
Float-Address Vectors
Cables
Test Connectors
Special Test Programs
Special Tools and Equipment
EINCCITT Data
Vendor Modem Products
Data Communication Troubleshooting
Communication Devices
DH11
DHB32
DHQ11
DHU11
DHV11
DMB32
DMCll
DMF32

VOLUME 2

COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS (CONT)

DMP11
DMR11
DMV11
DMZ32
DPV11
DSB32
DSV11
DUPll
DUV11
DZ11
DZ32
DZQ11
DZV11
KMV1A/KMV1A-S

VOLUME 3

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART I)

EINCCITT Data
Vendor Modem Products
Modems
DF02/DF03
DF1l2
DF124
DF124+
DF126
DF127
DF129
DF212-CA
DF224
DF242-CA
DFA01
Command Summary

VOLUME 4

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART 2)

Enclosures
DFMDevices
DFM Statistical Multiplexer
DFMX.25 PAD
Test Procedures
Modem Option Dictionary
Modem Theory
Autodialer Command/Response

VOLUME 5

ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 1)

Ethernet Devices
DEBNA/DEBNK
DECmux II
DECNA
DECOM
DEC router 200
DECSA
DEC server 100
DEC server 200
DEC server 500

VOLUME 6

ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 2)

Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DEFTR
DELNI
DELUA
DEMPR
DEMWA
DEPCA
DEQNA
DEREP
DESNC
DESPR
DESTA

VOLUME 7

ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 3)

Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DEUNA
H4000
H4005
LAN Bridge 100
MUXserver 100
TPENET
Cables
Special Tools and Test Equipment
Network Troubleshooting
Ethernet Configuration

DEFTRINSTALLATION

DEFTR BROADBAND ETHERNET FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR

General Description
The DEFTR broadband Ethernet frequency translator is used in conjunction with the DIGITAL broadband Ethernet transceivers (DECOM-BA and DECOM-BB) to create an Ethernet channel in single-cable
broadband networks.
The frequency translator receives signals transmitted by the DECOM-BA or DECOM-BB transceivers,
translates the signals to a higher frequency, transposes the signals, and retransmits them to the
transcei verso

DEFTR-J

DEFTRINSTALLATION

DEFTR Versions (Figure 1)
There is only one version of the DEFTR-AX* frequency translator.

NOTE
FOR DEFINITIONS OFTHE DEFTR FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR
CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS, SEE TABLE 1.
INPUT
MONITOR

TRANSCEIVER
TEST PORT

POWER
INDICATOR

~
~

LOCAL
OSCILLATOR

DEFTR-AX
(FRONT)

:~" yj1:
. ~':~UT
~I
OUTPUT

MONITOR

IREVERSE)

ATIENUATOR dB

OUTPUT (FORWARD)
ATIENTUATOR dB

RF
OUTPUT

RF
INPUT

DEFTR-AX
(REAR)

POWER
CORD
RECEPTACLE

LINE
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
MKV85-1162

Figure I

DEFTR-AX* Frequency Translator

*The letter "A" or "8" will appear in place of the "X" in the model designation to signify the following frequency translator input
voltages.

Model

Input Voltage

DEFTR-AA
DEFTR-AB

120 Vac
240 Vac

DEFTR-2

DEFTR INST ALLATION

Table 1 DEFTR Controls, Connectors, and Indicators
Description

Component
Front Panel
INPUT Attenuator

Adjusts the input (reverse channel) signal level to the frequency
translator in I dB increments, from 0 to 10 dB.

OUTPUT Attenuator

Adjusts the output (forward channel) signal level of the frequency translator in I dB increments, from 0 to 10 dB.

INPUT MONITOR Connector

Monitors the input signal received by the frequency translator
and reduces its level by 20 dB.

OUTPUT MONITOR Connector

Monitors the output signal produced by the frequency translator
and reduces its level by 20 dB.

LOCAL OSCILLATOR MONITOR
Connector

Presents the local oscillator output signal (282.25 MHz) and
reduces its level by 20 dB.

TRANSCEIVER TEST PORT
Connector

Provides a means for testing a DECOM transceiver.

POWER Indicator

Green LED indicating, when ON, that the frequency translator
is plugged in and that ac power is applied.

Rear Panel
RF INPUT Connector

Accepts the RF input signal.

RF OUTPUT Connector

Delivers the RF output signal.

Unused Connector

Components
The following parts are supplied with each DEFTR frequency translator.

Table 2

Frequency Translator Components

Model

Owner's
Manual

Power
Cord

DEFTR-AA
DEFTR-AB

Country
Kit
X*

*Power cord for DEFTR-AB unit comes in accompanying country kit DEBBK-AX, where "X" identifies
the country_

DEFTR-3

DEFfR INSTALLATION

Country Kits
Appropriate power cords are shipped in country kits that must be ordered separately with each DEFTR
frequency translator. The following table indicates the country kit for each particular country.
Table 3

Country Kits

Country Used In

Country Kit
Designation

Australia
Belgium
Canada - English
Canada - French
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland - French
Switzerland - German
United Kingdom

DEBBK-AZ
DEBBK-AB
DEBBK-AQ
DEBBK-AC
DEBBK-AD
DEBBK-AF
DEBBK-AN
DEBBK-AG
DEBBK-AH
DEBBK-AI
DEBBK-AN
DEBBK-AS
DEBBK-AM
DEBBK-AK
DEBBK-AL
DEBBK-AE

Reference Documentation
Title

Document
Number

DEFTR Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator Owner's Manual

EK-FRETR-OM

DEFTR Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator Technical Description

EK-FRETR-TD

DECOM Broadband Ethernet Transceiver Owner's Manual

EK-OOBET-OM

DECOM Broadband Ethernet Transceiver Technical Manual

EK-OOBET-TM

Broadband Ethernet Channel Specification and Certification Guide

EK-OOBEC-SM

The Ethernet Specifications

AA-K759X *-TK

*The letter "X" indicates the version of the document.

DEFTR-4

DEFTRINSTALLATION
Device Placement

•

Select the headend location of the cable plant within reach of an ac power source.

•

Mount the frequency translator in a standard 48.26 em (19 in) rack or on top of a desk or table at this
location.

NOTE
ALLOW AT LEAST 15.24 CM (6 IN) IN THE REAR AND
2.54 CM (1 IN) ON EACH SIDE OF THE UNIT FOR AIR
CIRCULATION.

WARNING
THE DEFTR FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR HAS BEEN CERTIFIED BY THE CANA·
DIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA) AS A SYSTEM COM PON ENT. TH E CSA
HAS NOT TESTED THE SAFETYOFTHE DEFTRWITH THE USE OFOTHER COM·
PONENTS IN THE RACK.

FREQUENCY

DESK OR
TABLE TOP

MKV85·1163

Figure 2

Frequency Translator Placement
DEFTR-5

DEFTR INSTALLATION

Power Requirements
AC input power is selectable.

120 Vac, 60 Hz, 0.29 A, 35 W
or
240 Vac, 50 Hz, 0.15 A, 35 W
Preinstallation Steps

Check that the network in which the frequency translator is being installed has been certified
according to the Broadband Ethernet Channel Specification and Certification Guide (EK-OOBECSM).

Set the INPUT (Reverse) and OUTPUT (Forward) attenuators to the appropriate dB settings by
using the procedures given in the Attenuator Settings section.

INPUT (REVERSE)
ATTENUATION dB

OUTPUT (FORWARD)
ATTENUATION dB
MKV85·1123

Figure 3

DEFTR Attenuator Locations

Attenuator Settings
The midrange path (leg) losses for the Forward and Reverse Ethernet channels are needed to determine
the attenuator settings. These path losses are included in the Ethernet Channel Site Management Guide
or Cable Facility Site Management Guide, which are produced as a result of the certification process. If
the midrange path losses are not included in either of these guides, use the following procedures to
determine the attenuator settings. If they are included, go to Step 3 in both the input and output
attenuator value determinations.

DEFTR-6

DEFTR INST ALLATION
Input (Reverse Channel) Attenuator Value Determination I.

Determine the minimum and maximum reverse signal levels from certification or proof of performance testing performed on the Ethernet channel or cable facility. This information should be in the
Ethernet Channel Site Management Guide or the Cable Facility Site Management Guide.

Determine the midrange of the reverse path loss by using the following formula:
Midr = LTSA - (Minr + Maxr)/2
Where:
Midr = Midrange reverse channel path loss (dB)
Minr = Minimum reverse channel signal level (dBmV) at 61 MHz
Maxr = Maximum reverse channel signal level (dBm V) at 61 MHz
LTSA = Level of test signal asserted (dBmV)

Determine the input attenuator setting by using the following formula:
Input Attenuator Setting = 50 - Midr

NOTE
If the input attenuator setting is a negative value, set
the input attenuator to 0 dB. If the input attenuator

setting is between 10 and 13 dB, set the input attenuator to 10 dB.
Output (Forward Channel) Attenuator Value Determination I.

Determine the minimum and maximum forward signal levels from certification or proof of performance testing performed on the Ethernet channel or cable facility. This information should be in the
Ethernet Channel Site Management Guide or the Cable Facility Site Management Guide.

Determine the midrange of the forward path loss by using the following formula:
Midf = LTSA - (Minf + Maxf)/2
Where:
Midf = Midrange forward channel path loss (dB)
Minf = Minimum forward channel signal level (dBmV) at 221 MHz
Maxf = Maximum forward channel signal level (dBmV) at 221 MHz
L TSA = Level of test signal asserted (dBm V)

Determine the output attenuator setting by using the following formula:
Output Attenuator Setting = 50 - Midf

NOTE
If the output attenuator setting is a negative value,
set the output attenuator to 0 dB. If the attenuator

setting is between 10 and 13 dB, set the output
attenuator to 10 dB.

DEFTR-7

DEFTRINSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram

OBTAIN CUSTOMER-SPECIFIED
INFORMATION:

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (REFER TO
TABLE 2)

PLACE DEFTR
FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR IN CHOSEN LO CATION (SEE FIGURE 2)

VERIFY INPUT AND OUTPUT ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

•

DEVICE PLACEMENT (SEE
"DEVICE PLACEMENT')

•

POWER REQUIREMENTS (SEE
"POWER REQUIREMENTS")

•

PREINSTALLATION CHECKS
(SEE "PREINSTALLATION
STEPS")

•

CONFIGURATION CONSTRAINTS
(SEE CABLE LENGTH
RESTRICTION")

_ (SEE STEP 2 OF "PRE/N-

STALLAT/ON STEPS"

VERIFY THAT VOLTAGE
SHOWN IN OPEN SLOT
OF VOLTAGE SELECTOR
UNIT IS CORRECT FOR
AC LINE VOLTAGE (SEE
FIGURE 5)

PLUG IN BOTH ENDS OF
POWER CORD (SEE
FIGURE 6)

MKV85-1169

Figure 4

DEFTR Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

DEFTR-8

DEFTR INSTALLATION

UNPLUG POWER CORD
AND CHECK FUSE.
REPLACE IF BLOWN.
(SEE FIGURE 5)

POWER CORRECTLY
CONNECTED. PROCEED
TO CONNECT CABLES TO
DEFTR FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR.

UNSCREW 75-0HM TERMINATORS FROM RF
INPUT AND RF OUTPUT
CONNECTORS ON REAR
OF DEFTR FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR

SCREW INPUT AND
OUTPUT RF CABLES
ONTO THE RF INPUT
AND RF OUTPUT CONNECTORS (SEE FIGURE 7)

UNIT IS FULLY
INSTALLED. INITIATE
VERIFICATION OF UNIT
OPERATION.

GO TO FIGURE 8 TO
VERIFY UNIT OPERATION

MKV85-1170

Figure 4

DEFfR Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

DEFTR-9

DEFTR INSTALLATION

CAUTION
INCORRECT VOLTAGE SELECTION CAN DAMAGE UNIT.

OPEN
SLOT

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
DRUM

~//

FUSE

HO:~>/ ~~'-I"",nJ
~,
FUSE

120VAC= 1A. 3A-G
240 VAC = 1A. 5MM
(.20 IN)

cr=JJ
MKV85-1164

Figure 5

Diagram for Setting Line Voltage

DEFTR~10

DEFTR INSTALLATION

POWER

MKV85·1165

Figure 6

Diagram for Connecting Power Cord

'J"

DEFTR-ll

DEFTR INST ALLATION

CAUTION
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE HEX-NUTS. FINGER
TIGHTEN ONLY.

ON FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR

RF INPUT
CONNECTOR

INPUT
RF CABLE

RF OUTPUT
CONNECTOR

NOTE
THESE CABLES SHOULD BE MARKED INPUT AND OUTPUT.
MKV85-1166

Figure 7

Diagram for Connecting RF Cables to DEFTR
Frequency Translator

DEFTR-12

DEFTR CABLING
Cable Length Restriction
Make sure that the RF cable length from the DEFTR frequency translator to any DECOM transceiver
does not exceed 1900 m (6234 ft).

DEFTR-13

DEFfR DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the DEFTR frequency translator. The NIE (Network
Exerciser) diagnostic, however, can be helpful in isolating faults to the frequency translator as discussed in
the Maintenance Aids section.

DEFTR-14

DEFTR MAINTENANCE AIDS

Prechecks
I.

Test all transceiver cables and make sure that they work properly, as described in the user documentation for the Ethernet controller.

Check that the RF cable length from the DEFTR frequency translator to any DECOM transceiver
does not exceed 1900 m (6234 ft).

Ethernet Controller Self-Test
The flow diagram in Figure 8 assumes that the Ethernet controller has a loopback test capability (such as,
NI exerciser), which can be used to test the translator and network cable facility. When the flow diagram
indicates "RUN ETHERNET CONTROLLER SELF-TEST," run this test on the translator by using the
Ethernet controller self-test or functional level testing software. Refer to the user and software documentation for the particular Ethernet controller being used.
Network Troubleshooting Table
Use Table 4 for a simple method of isolating a network problem to a DEFTR frequency translator,
DECOM transceiver, or network cable facility.

DEFTR-15

DEFTR MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 4

Network Troubleshooting

Problem

Probable Cause

Remedy

All DECOM transceivers
are NOT working and
other applications* are
NOT working.

Network cable facility

Get service for network
cable facility.

All DECOM transceivers
are NOT working and
other applications* are
working.

Frequency translator
(DEFTR)

Get service for DEFTR
frequency translator or
proceed to DEFTR
checkout flow diagram.

Some DECOM transceiveMrs
are NOT working.

Network cable facility
section

Get service for network
cable facility.

DEFTR attenuator
settings

Check settings.

DECOM transceiver

Use checkout flow
diagrams in the DECOM
owner's manual for a more thorough isolation procedure or get service for DECOM transceiver.

DEFTR attenuator
settings

Check settings.

One DECOM transceiver
is NOT working.

*"Other applications" means other datamodems, video equipment, T I type modems, and so forth, that use
the network cable facility as their transmission medium.

NOTE
Since Digital Equipment Corporation's certification
process does not always test every tap in large networks, a "certified" network may have some taps
that were not individually certified. After thoroughly
checking out the DEFTR frequency translator and
DECOM transceiver, check to find out if the taps
being used have been certified.

DEFTR-16

DEFfR MAINTENANCE AIDS

DEFfR Checkout Flow Diagram
Use the flow diagram in Figure 8 to check the operation of the DEFTR frequency translator.

TRANSLATOR AND
DECOM TRANSCEIVER(S)
ARE PROPERLY
CONNECTED TO

--{

SEE FIGURES 9
AND 10

--{

SEE STEP 2,
"PREINSTALLATIONSTEPS"

--{

SEE
NOTE 1
SEE
FIGURE 11

YES

CONNECT A KNOWN
GOOD DECOM TRANSCEIVER TO TRANSCEIVER
TEST PORT ON DEFTR
TRANSLATOR

SEE
NOTE 2

}--

FAIL

NOTE 1
SEE DECOM TEST PROCEDURES IN THE
DECOM OWNER'S MANUAL TO VERIFY A
"KNOWN GOOD DECOM TRANSCEIVER." ALSO,
REFER TO CABLE LENGTH RESTRICTIONS IN
THAT MANUAL
NOTE 2
USE NI EXERCISER HERE OR CONNECT AN
H4000-T ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER TESTER IN
PLACE OF THE ETHERNET CONTROLLER. IF
H4000-T TESTER IS USED, FOLLOW THE
H4000-T FUNCTIONAL TESTING.

Figure 8

MKV85-1167

Checkout Flow Diagram for DEFTR Frequency Translator
(Sheet 1 of 2)
DEFTR-17

DEFTR MAINTENANCE AIDS

SEE "DEFTR
END- TO-END
- { TEST" SECTION

SEE "DEFTR
END- TO-END
- { TEST" SECT/ON

YES

GO TO NETWORK

FAIL
GO TO NETWORK

MKV85-1168

Figure 8 Checkout Flow Diagram for DEFTR Frequency Translator
(Sheet 2 of 2)

DEFTR-18

DEFfR MAINTENANCE AIDS

DOWN
CONVERTER

TX/RX
OUTLET

DECOM
TRANSCEIVER

TO FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR (DEFTR)

I
I

TO ETHERNET
CONTROLLER
OR DEVICE

1"1~

----~
• I I TAP
"--LJ
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

TX/RX
RF DROP
CABLE

I
I
MKV85-1129

Figure 9

Network Connection Diagram for Transceiver

DEFTR FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR

RF OUTPUT
CONNECTOR
RF INPUT
CONNECTOR

OUTPUT
RF CABLE
INPUT
RF CABLE
MKV85-1130

Figure 10

Network Connection Diagram for DEFTR
Frequency Translator

)
DEFTR-19

DEFfR MAINTENANCE AIDS

DOWN
CONVERTER

TX/RX
OUTLET

TRANSCEIVER
TEST PORT

FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR (DEFTR)*

)

TO ETHERNET
CONTROLLER
OR DEVICE

'* CONNECTED TO WORKING
CABLE

NETWORK CABLE
FACILITY

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV85-1131

Figure 11

Transceiver to DEFTR Test Connection Diagram

DEFfR End-to-End Test
This section contains the test referred to when the DEFTR checkout flow diagram indicates "PERFORM
DEFTR END-TO-END TEST." The purpose of the test is to determine if the DEFTR frequency
translator will accept a known input signal, translate it to a higher frequency, and present this higher
frequency signal at the DEFTR output.
Required Test Equipment -

•

Calibrated signal generator -

Capable of generating a 60 MHz
signal at 0 dBm V into a 75-ohm load.

•

Calibrated tunable signal level meter -

Capable of measuring a 222.25 MHz
signal in a 34 to 58 dBm V range into
a 75-ohm load.

Test Procedure 1.

Disconnect the DEFTR frequency translator from the network by unscrewing the network RF cables
from the RF INPUT and RF OUTPUT connectors on the DEFTR frequency translator.

Refer to Figure 12. Note the settings of the OUTPUT (Forward) and INPUT (Reverse) attenuators
on the DEFTR frequency translator.

Adjust the signal generator for an output signal of 60 MHz, 0 dBmV into a 75-ohm load.

Adjust the level meter for an input signal of 222.25 MHz, 56 dBmV.

Set the INPUT (Reverse) attenuator on the DEFTR frequency translator to 0 dB.

DEFTR-20

DEFTR MAINTENANCE AIDS
6.

Connect the output cable from the signal generator to the DEFTR RFINPUT connector.

Set the OUTPUT (Forward) attenuator on the DEFTR frequency translator to 0 dB.

Connect the input cable from the signal level meter to the DEFTR RF OUTPUT connector.

Measure the frequency and level of the DEFTR output signal with the signal level meter.

IF:

THEN:

Frequency = 222.25 MHz

DEFTR frequency translator
passes test. Go to Step 10.

and
Level = 56 dBm V ±2 dBm V
Frequency and/or level not
eq ual to above

DEFTR frequency translator
fails test. Return to DEFTR
flow diagram.

10. Set the OUTPUT (Forward) and INPUT (Reverse) attenuators on the DEFTR frequency translator
to the values noted above in Step 2.
11. Measure the level of the DEFTR output signal with the signal level meter.

IF:

THEN:

Level = 56 dBm V ±2 dBm V minus
the sum of the OUTPUT (Forward)
and INPUT (Reverse) attenuator
settings

DEFTR frequency translator
passes end-to-end test.
Return to DEFTR flow diagram.

Level not equal to above

DEFTR frequency translator fails
end-to-end test. Return to DEFTR
flow diagram.

)
DEFTR-21

DEFfR MAINTENANCE AIDS

DEFTR
FRONT

INPUT (REVERSE)
ATTENUATOR dB
OUTPUT (FORWARD)
ATTENUATOR dB

DEFTR
REAR

SIGNAL
GENERATOR

SIGNAL LEVEL
METER
MKV85-1132

Figure 12

Diagram for DEFTR End-to-End Test

DEFTR-22

DELNI INSTALLATION

DELNI LOCAL NETWORK INTERCONNECT
General Description
The DELNI local network interconnect is a standalone device that permits interconnection and communication between Ethernet-compatible stations. The DELNI local network interconnect is shown in the
following figure.
NOTE
The DELNI unit is not addressable or programmable. In addition, the DELNI unit does not require
or use the -15 V that is normally supplied by the
Ethernet controller or the auxiliary power supply
(DEXPS). The DELNI unit does, however, supply
-15 V to its GLOBAL connector for use by a connected Ethernet transceiver.

)

CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR
INPUT
MKV84-1634

Figure 1 DELNI Local Network Interconnect

DELNI-I

DELNI INSTALLATION

DELNI Configurations

The DELNI interconnect may be used to configure the following LANs (local area networks).
1.

As a single-tier standalone network interconnect up to 8 stations may be interconnected via the
local connectors.

As a two-tier standalone network interconnect up to 64 stations may be interconnected.

As a connected network interconnect up to 8 stations may be connected to an Ethernet coaxial
cable.

The following figures illustrate typical single-tier, two-tier, and connected DELNI LAN configurations.
The mode switch position is also shown.

LOCAL MODE*

* SEE "MODES OF OPERATION" SECTION.
MKV84-1635

Figure 2 Single-Tier DELNI LAN Configuration

DELNI-2

DELNI INSTALLATION

LOCAL MODE*

* SEE "MODES OF OPERATION" SECTION.
MKV84-1636

Figure 3 Two-Tier DELNI LAN Configuration

Fi:

ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE

~
[Mn

GLOBAL MODE'71~;;

* SEE "MODES OF OPERATION" SECTION.
MKV84-1637

Figure 4 DELNI LAN Connected to an Ethernet Network

DELNI-3

DELNI INSTALLATION
Modes of Operation
The DELNI interconnect can operate in one of two modes:
•

In LOCAL mode the eight local connectors are interconnected.

•

In GLOBAL mode the eight LOCAL connectors and the GLOBAL connector are
interconnected.

The following figures show differences in the data and collision signaling paths that characterize the
LOCAL and GLOBAL modes of operation.

DELNI (LOCAL MODE)

XCVR TRANSMIT PAIR
"::XA:X~X~

CH1 TRANSMIT PAl R

---

XCVR RECEIVE PAIR

CH1 RECEIVE PAIR
...
.x:

----r-- _~..x

CH1 COLLISION
PRESENCE PAl R

~"'.x:<)xC~>C.K)Y~A~.x:()ACY~~~--~~-------1I-----------~~

CH2 TRANSMIT PAIR

- .....

CH2 RECEIVE PAIR
~--.-

............

XCVR COLLISION
PRESENCE PAIR
~xx - -

---

--x
-

LOCAL COLLISION
AND HEARTBEAT
SIGNALING

-----

__ _
---

CH2 COLLISION
PRESENCE PAl R

:Jx(~)C_->-C(-~~~-~~)CX~·~~---t..-------tt-------------~

•
•
•

LOCAL TRANSMIT
AND RECEIVE
DATA PATH

•
•
CH8 TRANSMIT PAl R

~x-x:x-~ x~

CH8
PAIR
....x xRECEIVE
-..x.

CH8 COLLlSI()\J
PRESENCE PAl R

v-'.A-'x~~

MKV84-1038

Figure 5 LOCAL Mode Input/Output Signal Flow
DELNI-4

DELNI INSTALLATION

XCVR TRANSMIT PAl R

....CH1 TRANSMIT PAl R

- -

-x. =.JlU':-

XCVR RECEIVE PAIR
--_x_~

CH1 RECEIVE PAIR

...

---~-

XCVR COLLISION
PRESENCE PAl R

CHl COLLISION
PRESENCE PAIR

....

Y""-- -.....-. -. ......-

.Jilt

- --,
.JIlt X

CH2 TRANSMIT PAl R

- -

~I-J{-I ][

-.. - -

--~-

GLOBAL
COLLISION
AND HEARTBEAT
SIGNALING

...

CH2 RECEIVE PAl R

CH2 COLLISION
PRESENCE PAl R

--- - -- - - JC:X.A..JII Y

)

---

•
•
•
•
•

GL08AL
RECEIVE
DATA PATH

CH8 TRANSMIT PAIR
J{

.. _--

-.-~

...

CH8 RECEIVE PAl R

CH8 COLLISION
PRESENCE PAl R

"V""- -

-][
---

.:x-

MKV84-1037

Figure 6

GLOBAL Mode Input/Output Signal Flow

Physical Description
Length
Width
Height
Weight

19.68 em (7.75 in)
44.45 em (17.50 in)
5.72 em (2.25 in)
6.35 kg (14.0 lbs)

Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Relative Humidity

5° to 50°C (41° to 122°F)
10% to 90% (no condensation)

DELNI-5

DELNI INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information relative to the DELNI local network interconnect.

•

DELNI Local Network Interconnect
Technical Manual

EK-DELNI-TM

•
•
•

DELNI Local Network Interconnect Microfiche

EP-DELNI-TM

DELNI Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-01656

The Ethernet - Local Area Network,
Data Link Layer and Physical Layer
Specifications

AA-K759A-TK

DEXRM DELNI Rackmount Kit Installation Guide

EK-DEXRM-IN

•

DELNI Versions
There are two versions of the DELNI interconnect.
•
•

DELNI-AA (configured for u.S area applications)
DELNI-AB (configured for European/GIA applications)

The following table lists the differences between the versions.
Table 1 DELNI Version Differences

Version

Fuse
Rating

Fuse
Holder

Voltage
Switch
Setting

DELNI-AA
DELNI-AB

AGe 1/2

.5 A

.06 mm (.25 in)
5.0 mm (.20 in)

120 Vac
240 Vac

DELNI Hardware Components
The following tables list the parts that make up a DELNI-AA and DELNI-AB network interconnect.
Table 2 DELNI-AA Parts List
Description

Part Designation

DELNI-AA

•
•

•

DELNI system box
Power cord
DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

DELNI-6

DELNI INSTALLATION
Table 3 DELNI-AB Parts List
Description

Part Designation

DELNI-AB

DELNI system box

DELNK-Ax

DELNI country kit:
•
•

Power cord
DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

Country Kits
Appropriate power cords and installation/owner's manuals are shipped in country kits that must be
ordered separately with each DELNI interconnect. The following table indicates the country kit associated
with each particular country.
Table 4 Country Kits

)

Country Used In

Country Kit
Designation

Australia
Belgium
Canada - English
Canada - French
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland - French
Switzerland - German
United Kingdom

DELNK-AZ
DELNK-AB
DELNK-AQ
DELNK-AC
DELNK-AD
DELNK-AF
DELNK-AN
DELNK-AG
DELNK-AH
DELNK-AI
DELNK-AN
DELNK-AS
DELNK-AM
DELNK-AK
DELNK-AL
DELNK-AE

System Placement
The DELNI interconnect can be located in any convenient location. Typical locations might include a:
•
•
•

Shelf,
Table, or
DEXRM rackmount assembly (optional).

Power Requirements
The DELNI interconnect operates on ac power, 50 to 60 Hz. A voltage select switch is used to select
operation from 120 Vac or 240 Vac.

)

The DELNI interconnect draws 0.35 A at 120 Vac and 0.18 A at 240 Vac.
DELNI-7

DELNI INSTALLATION
Required Equipment
The H4000-Tx transceiver tester is required to test the function of an installed DELNI network interconnect. The following diagnostics may also be helpful in verifying DELNI functions.
•
•

NI exerciser
Functional (on-line) diagnostics run from the connected Ethernet controller

Installation Flow Diagram
The following flow diagram illustrates the procedures for installing and testing the DELNI local network
interconnect.
OBTAIN CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC
INFORMATION:
• SYSTEM PLACEMENT (SEE
"SYSTEM PLACEMENT')
PREINSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS

UNPACK AND VERIFY ALL
COMPONENTS RECEIVED
(REFER TO TABLE 2 OR
TABLE 3)

•

POWER REQUIREMENTS (SEE
"POWER REQUIREMENTS")

•

MODE OF OPERATION (SEE "DELNI
CONFIGURATIONS")

• CONFIGURATION CONSTRAINTS
(SEE "CABLE LENGTH
RESTRICTIONS")

PLACE THE DELNI
INTERCONNECT IN THE
CHOSEN LOCATION

VERIFY VOLTAGE SWITCH
SETTING (REFER TO
FIGURE 8)

SET MODE SWITCH TO
LOCAL OR GLOBAL MODE
IF NECESSARY (REFER TO
"DELNI CONFIGURATIONS")

MKV84-1638

Figure 7 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)
DELNI-8

DELNI INSTALLATION

ENTER FROMc::J
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECT STATION
CABLES TO THE LOCAL
CONNECTORS AND LOCK
IN PLACE (REFER TO
FIGURE 12)

CONNECT CABLE FROM
AN ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER OR FROM
A DELNI INTERCONNECT
TO THE GLOBAL
CONNECTOR

PLUG IN BOTH ENDS OF
THE POWER CORD

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW DIAGRAM

MKV84-1639

Figure 7 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

\
)

DELNI-9

DELNI INSTALLATION

TEST DELNI
FUNCTIONALITY WITH
THE H4000-Tx
TRANSCEIVER TESTER

DEPENDING ON THE CONFIGURATION,
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONALITY TEST
MAY INCLUDE ANY OF THE
FOLLOWING:
•
•

RUN THE NI EXERCISER
RUN FUNCTIONAL DIAGNOSTICS
FROM THE STATIONS CONNECTED
TO THE DELNI INTERCONNECT

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW DIAG RAM

THE UNIT IS FULLY
INSTALLED. INITIATE
CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE.

MKV84-1640

Figure 7 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

DELNI-IO

DELNI INSTALLATION

Voltage and Mode Selection
Operating voltage and mode selection is accomplished by setting a voltage switch and a mode switch.
Operation of the switches is shown in the following illustration.

SLIDE SWITCH
UP FOR G L O B A @
MODE.
0

SLIDE SWITCH
TO RIGHT
FOR 120 Vac

SETTING THE
MODESWITC@

SLIDE SWITCH
DOWN FOR
LOCAL MODE.

SETTING THE

VOLTAGE S W I @

SLIDE SWITCH
TO LEFT
FOR 240 Vac

MKV84-1641

Figure 8 Setting the DELNI Voltage and Mode Switches

)
DELNI-ll

DELNI CABLING

Cable Length Restrictions
Two cable types may be connected to the DELNI interconnect. They are:
•
•

BNE3x-xx
BNE4x-xx

The BNE4x-xx cable is a flexible office-type cable that has approximately four times the attenuation of a
BNE3x-xx cable.
The following illustrations indicate the maximum allowable cable lengths for the two cable types.

BNE3X-XX
STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEUNA

40 M
(131.24 FT)
BNE4X-XX 10 M
(32.81 FT)

BNE3X-XX
STATION
BNE4X-XX
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEQNA

50 M
(164.05 FT)
12.5 M
(41.01 FT)

DELNI
(LOCAL MODE)

BNE3X-XX

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DECNA
(SEE NOTE)

45 M
(147.65FT)
BNE4X-XX 11.25 M
(SEE NOTE) (36.91 FT)

LEGEND

LOCAL CONNECTOR
GLOBAL CONNECTOR

NOTE:
THE DECNA CONTROLLER IS EQUIPPED WITH A
5 M (16.41 FT) LENGTH OF BNE3X-XX CABLE
THAT HAS A SPECIAL CONNECTOR ON THE
CONTROLLER END OF THE CABLE. THE CABLE
LENGTH SPECIFIED ABOVE IS IN ADDITION TO
THIS 5 M (16.41 FT) CABLE LENGTH.
MKV84-1642

Figure 9

Maximum Cable Lengths with Single-Tier DELNI LAN

DELNI-12

DELNI CABLING

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DE UNA

BNE3X-XX 50 M
(164.05 H)
BNE4X-XX 12.5 M
(41.01 FT)

BNE3X-XX 40 M
(131.24 FT)
BNE4X-XX 10 M
(32.81 H)
**

**
**

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEQNA

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DECNA
(SEE NOTE)

STATION

)

CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEUNA

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEQNA

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DECNA
(SEE NOTE)

BNE3X-XX 50 M
(164.05 FT)
BNE4X-XX 12.5 M
(41.01 FT)

DELNI
(LOCAL MODE)

DELNI
(GLOBAL MODE)

BNE3X-XX 45 M
(147.65 FT)
BNE4X-XX 11.25 M
(36.91 H)

BNE3X-XX 40 M
(131.24 H)
BNE4X-XX 10M
(32.81 FT)

BNE3X-XX 50 M
(164.05 FT)
BNE4X-XX 12.5 M
(41.01 FT)

BNE3X-XX 45 M
(147.65 FT)
BNE4X-XX 11.25 M
(SEE NOTE)(36.91 FT)
LEGEND
LOCAL CONNECTOR

## GLOBAL CONNECTOR
NOTE:
THE DECNA CONTROLLER IS EQUIPPED WITH A 5 M (16.41 FT) LENGTH OF BNE3X-XX
CABLE THAT HAS A SPECIAL CONNECTOR ON TH E CONTROLLER END OF THE CABLE.
THE CABLE LENGTH SPECIFIED DOES NOT INCLUDE THIS 5 M (16.41 FT) CABLE
LENGTH.
MKV84-1643

Figure 10 Maximum Cable Lengths with Two-Tier DELNI LAN

)

DELNI-13

DELNI CABLING

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEUNA

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DEQNA

STATION
CONTROLLER
TYPE:
DECNA
(SEE NOTE 2)

A
BNE3X-XX 40 M
(131.23FT)
BNE4X-XX 8.75 M
(SEE NOTE 1) (28.71 FT)

B
(SEE NOTE 3)

ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER

DELNI
(GLOBAL MODE)

A
BNE3X-XX 45 M
(147.64 FT)
BNE4X-XX 10 M
(SEE NOTE 1) (32.81 FT)

LEGEND

A
BNE3X-XX

40 M
(131.23 FT)
BNE4X-XX 8.75 M
(SEE NOTE 1) (28.71 FT)

NOTES
1. THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IS THE TOTAL
CABLE LENGTH ALLOWABLE BETWEEN
THE CONTROLLER AND THE DELNI
INTERCONNECT AND BETWEEN THE
DELNI INTERCONNECT AND THE
ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER (THAT IS,
LENGTHS A + B).
2.

** LOCAL CONNECTOR
## GLOBAL CONNECTOR

THE CABLE SEGMENT LABELED B MAY
BE MADE UP OF TWO TRANSCEIVER
CABLES JOINED IN AN ETHERJACK
CONNECTION BOX.

THE DECNA CONTROLLER IS EQUIPPED
WITH A 5 M (16.41 FT) LENGTH OF BNE3XXX CABLE THAT HAS A SPECIAL
CONNECTOR ON THE CONTROLLER END
OF THE CABLE. THE CABLE LENGTH
SPECIFIED ABOVE IS IN ADDITION TO THIS
5 M (1 6.41 FT) CABLE LENGTH.
MKV85-1225

Figure 11

Maximum Cable Lengths with a Connected DELNI LAN

DELNI-14

DELNI CABLING

Cable Connections
The following illustration shows:
1.
2.
3.

Conecting cables to a LOCAL connector.
Connecting a cable to the GLOBAL connector.
Connecting the power cord.

TO
LATCH

AFTER CONNECTING,
PUSH CABLE
SLIDE-LATCH DOWN

~n
~CONNE~OR
LOCAL

2.
AFTER CONNECTING,
PUSH CONNECTOR

MKV84-1645

Figure 12

Connecting Cables to the DELNI Interconnect

)
DELNI-15

DELNI DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the DELNI interconnect. Note, however, that the
following may be helpful in isolating faults.
•
•

The NI exerciser (NIE)
Functional diagnostics run on systems connected to the DELNI unit under test (UUT)

DELNI-16

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

DELNI Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
When the DELNI interconnect is suspected of any malfunction, the entire DELNI unit should be
replaced.
Troubleshooting Equipment
The H4000-TA (or "-TB" for non-U.S. versions) transceiver tester is required for maintaining the DELNI
local network interconnects.
Troubleshooting Tips
The following hardware problems can affect DELNI interconnect performance.
•
•
•
•

Excessive cable lengths or cable damage.
Cable and/or connector failure.
Improperly assembled connectors (refer to the "Cables" section of this manual).
Certain transceiver power problems.

)

DELNI-17

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
The following flow diagram indicates the procedures for fault isolation in the DELNI interconnect.

CHECK AND CORRECT IF
NECESSARY:
•

120/240 V SWITCH

•

POWER CONNECTIONS

• FUSE
• AC POWER TO DELNI
INTERCONNECT

CHECK LOCAL/GLOBAL
SWITCH SETTING.
CORRECTIFNECESSAR~

TEST FUNCTIONALITY OF
DELNI INTERCONNECT
WITH AN H4000-Tx
TRANSCEIVER TESTER.
CONFIGURE H4000-Tx
TESTER FOR LOOPBACK
TESTING (REFER TO
FIGURE 14).

DEPENDING ON THE CONFIGURATION,
OTHER FUNCTIONALITY TEST MAY
INCLUDE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:
•

RUN THE NI EXERCISER

•

RUN FUNCTIONAL DIAGNOSTICS
FROM THE STATIONS CONNECTED
TO THE DELNI INTERCONNECT

•

LOCAL INPUTS TO THE DELNI
INTERCONNECT MAY BE
INTERCHANGED TO ISOLATE
ANY FAILING CHANNELS.

SET H4000-T MODE
SWITCH TO 'TX/RX"

MKV84-1646

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 7)

DELNI-18

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION
PRESS AND RELEASE
THE "RESET" BUnON

* DID THE SYMPTOM CHANGE? IF
SO, THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL
PROBLEM MAY EXIST. REPLACE
THE ORIGINAL FRU TO SEE IF THE
ORIGINAL SYMPTOMS RETURN.
THIS NEW INFORMATION MAY BE
USEFUL IN ANALYZING THE
PROBLEM.
MKV84-1647

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 7)

DELNI-19

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

EXIT

MKV84-1648

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 7)

DELNI-20

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

DISCONNECT H4000-Tx
TESTER FROM THE UUT
(UNIT UNDER TEST)

CONNECT THE SECOND
H4000-Tx TESTER TO THE
OTHER LOCAL
CONNECTOR OR
TRANSCEIVER (REFER TO
FIGURE 15)

MKV84-1649

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram,(Sheet 4 of 7)

)
DELNI-21

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION

VERIFY OPERATION OF
THE SECOND LOCAL
CONNECTOR OR
TRANSCEIVER

CONFIGURE BOTH
TESTERS FOR END·TO·
END CONNECTIVITY TEST
(REFER TO FIGURE 15)

1' SET H4000·T MODE
SWITCH TO "TX/RX"

_
{

2. PRESS AND RELEASE
THE "RESET" BUTTON

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

MKV84·1650

Figure .13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 7)

DELNI-22

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION
PRESS THE "RESET"
BUTTON ON THE "TX/RX"
MODE H4000-T

)
GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

DID THE SYMPTOM CHANGE? IF
SO, THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL
PROBLEM MAY EXIST. REPLACE
THE ORIGINAL FRU TO SEE IFTHE
ORIGINAL SYMPTOMS RETURN.
THIS NEW INFORMATION MAY BE
USEFUL IN ANALYZING THE
PROBLEM.
MKVB4-1651

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 6 of 7)

)
DELNI-23

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

RETURN NETWORK TO
NORMAL
CONFIGURATION

EXIT

MKV84-1652

Figure 13

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 7 of 7)

DELNI-24

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS

Typical H4000-Tx Tester Configurations
The following figure shows a typical H4000-Tx tester configuration for loopback testing of a DELNI
interconnect. Note that the tester may be connected to any local connector on the DELNI unit.
The tester configuration for a DELNI unit connected to an Ethernet cable is the same as shown below. Be
sure that the mode switch is set to the GLOBAL mode .

..
DELNI
INTERCONNECT

********
~J

H4000-Tx
TRANSCEIVER
TESTER
(TX/RX MODE)

* LOCAL CONNECTOR
** GLOBAL CONNECTOR
MKV84-1653

Figure 14 Typical H4000-Tx Configuration for Loopback Testing

DELNI-25

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS
The following figure shows a typical H4000-Tx tester configuration for end-to-end testing of a DELNI
interconnect. Note that the H4000-Tx tester(s) may be connected to any local connector on the DELNI
unit.

COAXIAL CABLE
(MAX. SEGMENT LENGTH: 500 METERS)

~I~

500HM
TERMINATOR

H4000 DIGITAL
ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER

~ETHERNET

Ill'l

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

II'\.
11,\
q SEE NOTE 2
II

**
DELNI
INTERCONNECT

"'I

I,"
II
'I
II

(GLOBAL MODE)

UUT

*-cl::::!--- SEE NOTE 1

)(

1/
II
II
II

~=================~

h
H4000-TX
TESTER

H4000TX
TESTER

(TX/RX MODE)

(RX ONLY MODE)

* LOCAL CONNECTOR
** GLOBAL CONNECTOR
NOTES:
1.

WHEN CONNECTED TO THIS POINT, THE UUT (UNIT UNDER TEST)
AND THE ASSOCIATED TRANSCEIVER IS TESTED.

WHEN CONNECTED TO THIS POINT, THE UUT AND THE
INTERVENING CABLE PLANT IS TESTED.
MKV84-1654

Figure 15

Typical H4000-Tx Configuration for End-to-End Testing

DELNI-26

DELNI MAINTENANCE AIDS
DELNI Tech Tips/FCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DELNI local network interconnect. Space
is provided for adding new information.
Table 5 DELNI Tech Tips/FCO Index
Tech
Tip No.

Title

Speed
Bulletin

DELNI Troubleshooting

296

TT2

DELNI Installation Precautions

297

TT3A

DELNI & H4000-T Transceiver Tester

385

)
DELNI-27

DELQA INSTALLATION
DELQA COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
General Description
The DELQA module is a Q-Bus communications controller that enables higher-level software, such as
DECnet, to communicate over an Ethernet network.
The DELQA module conforms to the Ethernet Local Area Network Specification (Version 2.0) and is
compatible with IEEE Specification 802.3 for Local Area Networks.
The DELQA module transfers encapsulated data packets of 60 to 1514 bytes between buffers in host
memory and an Ethernet transceiver. A 4-byte CRC is appended to these transmit packets by the DELQA
to make the length of the packets on the Ethernet between 60 and 1518 bytes. When packets are received by
the DELQA, the 4-byte CRC is stripped from each packet.
The DELQA module is programmed from the Q-Bus using 8-word addresses in the I/O page, and can
perform block-mode DMA to and from Q-Bus memory. In addition to providing an Ethernet interface, the
DELQA module supports some functions of the Maintenance Operations Protocol (MOP).
DELQA Features
The DELQA module operates in one of two switchable modes: normal mode or DEQNA-lock mode.
In normal mode, the DELQA module supports the following functions:
•

Maintenance operation protocol (MOP) messages for remote boot, request 10, transmit system
10, and loopback

•

IEEE 802.3 maintenance messages for XID and TEST on NULL LSAP access points

•

Self-test on powerup and via host command

•

Single Ethernet physical address

•

Multiple Ethernet multicast address

•

All standard DEQNA functions, except multiple Ethernet physical address and the automatic
enabling of the on-board sanity timer at powerup.

In DEQNA-lock mode, the DELQA module provides functional compatibility with DEQNA modules, but
at the expense of some normal mode functions. The functions supported are:
•
•
•

Multiple Ethernet physical addresses
Multiple Ethernet multicast addresses
Sanity timer (switch enabled on powerup).

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DELQA communications controller.

•

DECnet Maintenance Operations Protocol (MOP)
Functional Specification V3.0

AA-X436A-TK

•

DECnet-RSX System Manager's Guide

AA-H224C-TC

•

DECnet-ULTRIX Guide to Network Management

AA-EE38A-TE

DELQA-l

DELQA INSTALLATION

•

DECnet-VAX System Manager's Guide

AA-H803C-TE

•

DEC/XII User's Manual

AC-F053-MC

•

DELQA Technical Manual

EK-DELQA-TM

•

DELQA User's Guide

EK-DELQA-UG

•

DELQA-S Installation Guide

EK-DELQA-IN

•

Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-02379-01

DELQA Components
The DELQA-M communications controller shipment consists of:

•
•

One DELQA-M (M7516) base module
One DELQA User's Guide (EK-DELQA-UG).

Table 1 lists the cabinet kits that must be ordered separately with each DELQA-M communications
controller.
Table 1

DELQA Cabinet Kits

Cabinet Kit

Cabinet

Cable Length

CK-DELQA-YB

BA23

30.5 cm (12 inch)

CK-DELQA-YA

BA123

53.6 cm (21 inch)

CK-DELQA-YF

H9642

91.5 cm (36 inch)

Each kit is supplied with a module-to-bulkhead cable
of the appropriate length, and a 15-pin bulkhead loopback connector (12-22196-02).
The DELQA-SF communications controller shipment consists of:
•

One M7516-PA quad-height BA200 format Ethernet interface module

•

One DELQA-S Installation Guide (EK-DELQA-IN)

•

One gap filler assembly

•

One loopback connector (I 2-22196-02).

DELQA-2

DELQAINSTALLATION

Device Placement
The DELQA module is a dual-height module and may be placed in either a Q/CD or Q/Q backplane slot. If
it is installed in a Q/Q slot with no adjacent module, an M9047 grant continuity card is required in the
vacant slot.
Power Requirements/Q-Bus Loading
Table 2 shows the power requirements and bus loading for the DELQA module.
Table 2

Power Requirements/Q-Bus Loading
Power

Q-Bus Load
AC
DC

Typical

Maximum

3.3

+5 V +12 V

2.7 A 0.5 A

3.0 A 1.5 A

0.5

Current
Typical

Maximum

19.5 W

33.0 W

NOTE
At powerup, the surge current into the transceiver is
sufficiently high enough to current-limit some power
supplies.

DELQA-3

DELQA INSTALLATION
Installing the Module

OBTAIN CUSTOMER
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
• SYSTEM
PLACEMENT
• DEVICE PLACEMENT
• BUS LOADING
• POWER
REQUIREMENTS
• CUSTOMER
APPLICATION
REQUIREMENTS:
I.E. DEVICE ADDRESS,
VECTOR ADDRESS,
ETC.

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED
APPLY POWER. VERIFY
SELECTED BACKPLANE
SLOT VOLTAGES. THEN
TURN POWER OFF

CONFIGURE SWITCHES
ON MODULE FOR
CUSTOMER
REQUIREMENTS

DO NOT INSTALL
OPTION

1.f

DEVICE ADDRESS SW1
MODE/OPTION S3 AND S4

MKV88·1990

Figure 1

Installation Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 3)

DELQA-4

DELQA INSTALLATION

RELOCATE MODULES
AND GRANT
CONTINUITY CARDS
AS NECESSARY TO
FREE THE APPROPRIATE BACKPLANE
SLOT(S) FOR THE
DELOA MODULE(S)

INSTALL THE
APPROPRIATE
CABINET KIT

CONNECT THE
CABINET KIT CABLE
TO THE MODULE

CONNECT A LOOPBACK CONNECTOR TO
THE BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR

TURN THE SYSTEM ON
AND CHECK LEDS FOR
CORRECT SELF- TEST
INDICATION

TURN THE SYSTEM
POWER OFF AND
DISCONNECT THE
POWER CORD

MKV88-1991

Figure I

Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 2 of 3)

DELQA-5

~ELQAINSTALLATION

. DISCONNECT THE
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR

TYPE 1 AT THE MAIN
MENU TO ADD NEW
MODULE TO CONFIGURATION FILE

TYPE 2 AT THE MAIN
MENU TO SHOW
THE SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

TYPtT·AT THE MAIN
MENU TO RUN THE
SYStEM TESTS

TYPE 1 AJ'THE MAIN
MENU TO RUN
SYSTEM TEST

MKV88-1992

Figure 1

Installation Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 3)

DELQA-6

DELQA INSTALLATION
DELQA Module Address and Vector
Table 3

Module Address and Vectors

Base Address

Vector Address

Slot

Module

17774440

120 (fixed)

DELQA 1

DELQA or DEQNA

17774460

Floating (rank 47)

DELQA 2

DELQA or DEQNA

DELQA Switch Settings
The DELQA module switches (Figures 2 and 3) must be set for compatibility with the host system
configuration.

NOTE
Static electricity can damage theDELQA module.
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap connected to an
active ground and use a grounded work surface when
working on a system with covers removed.
The DELQA contains five switches, SI through S5; however, only three are used to establish a DELQA
configuration. The remaining switches are reserved. Table 4 shows the switches and describes them.
All the default switch settings are closed, which results in the following:
•
•
•

Base address = 17774440
Mode = Normal
MOP remote boot disabled.

This is the recommended configuration for most applications.

DELQA-7

DELQA INSTALLATION

~-------------' 000
123
OPEN

PICOFUSE (5 A)

(LANCE)

(68000 ROM)

(RAM)

(RAM)
(RAM)

(QIC)

(QNA2)

(SA ROM)

I
MKV88·1958

Figure 2

DELQA-M Module Layout

DELQA-8

DELQA INSTALLATION

PIca FUSE
(5 A)

LEDS

(SWITCHES)
(LANCE)

(68000 ROM)

1(68000 ROM)I ....-_ _-,
(RAM)
(RAM)
(RAM)
(RAM)

(SA ROM)

MKV88-1993

Figure 3

DELQA-S Module Layout

DELQA-9

DELQA INSTALLATION
Table 4

DELQA Switches

Switch

Position

Description
Unit Select Switch

Selects the modules default address (17774440)
Selects the address 17774460

Closed
Open
S2

Reserved

Mode Switch
Closed
Open

Selects normal mode
Selects DEQNA-lock mode
S3 determines the function of S4 as shown below.

Option Switch
S3

Closed
Closed

Closed
Open

Remote boot disabled
Remote boot enabled

Open

Closed

Sanity timer disabled at powerup

Open

Sanity timer enabled at powerup*

* This condition causes a host boot every four minutes if the sanity timer is not reset by
the host software.

Ethernet Address
The unique physical address of the DELQA module within Ethernet is stored in the station address ROM on
the DELQA module. A record of this address is printed on a sticker on the handle of the module.
This address should be given to the network manager for configuration.
NOTE
Because of the risk of damage to the module and
ROM, the following procedure is not recommended
and should be used only if there is no alternative.
If it is necessary to replace the DELQA module while retaining the same physical Ethernet address, it is
possible to swap the station address ROM to the replacement module. The stickers must be swapped also if
this procedure is used.
If the Ethernet address is changed, the only software change required is to update the physical Ethernet
address of the node at those host systems that use the node for down-line loading over the Ethernet.

DELQA-IO

DELQA CABLING
Connection to Ethernet
When the diagnostics have shown an error-free system, connect the DELQA module to an H4xxx transceiver or DELNI interconnect with a BNE3xx cable. Table 5 lists the transceiver cable options.

Table 5

BNE3X-nn Transceiver Cable Options

Cable

Material

Connector

Length

BNE3A-05/12
BNE3A-IO/J2
BNE3A-20/ J2

PVC
PVC
PVC

Straight
Straight
Straight

5 m (16.4 ft)
10m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft) BNE3A-40/12 PVC
Straight 40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3B-05/12
BNE3B-1O/12
BNE3B-20/12
BNE3B-40/12

PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC

Right angle
Right angle
Right angle
Right angle

5 m (16.4 ft)
10m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3C-05/12

Tefion™

Straight

5 m(16.4 ft)

BNE3C-l 0/12
BNE3C-20/12
BNE3C-40/12

Teflon
Teflon
Teflon

Straight
Straight
Straight

10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3D-05/12
BNE3D-I0/12
BNE3D-20/12
BNE3D-40/J2

Teflon
Teflon
Teflon
Teflon

Right angle
Right angle
Right angle
Right angle

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40m(131.2ft)

Teflon is a trademark of E.I. duPont de Nemours & Company, Inc.

DELQA-ll

DELQA DIAGNOSTICS
DELQA Diagnostics
The DELQA module is designed to help diagnostics find a faulty Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) rapidly. In
addition to thed self-test, there are diagnostic tests that are processor-specific.
Self-Test
The DELQA module has a power-up self-test that includes an external loopback test. In order for the
external loopback test to pass, a O-type loopback connector, an H4080 loopback connector, or a valid
Ethernet network must be connected to the IS-pin 0- subminiature connector on the OELQA module.
The self-test is available only when the DELQA is in normal mode. The host operating system software can
request the self-test through the OESQA Q-Bus register.
Table 6 shows the power-up LED sequence and Table 7 shows the remote boot LED sequence when the selftest is run.
Table 6

Module LED Sequences (Power-Up)

LEDl

LED2

LED3

Definition

Normal Mode
ON

OFF

Executing internal logic self-test

OFF

Self-test executing external loopback test

Ready to execute citizenship tests and/or
normal functions, or module self-test

LEOs turn on and stay on

DEQNA Mode
ON

Table 7

Module LED Sequences (Remote Boot or Citizenship Test) Normal or DEQNA Mode

LEDl

LED2

LED3

Definition

Ready to execute citizenship test and/or normal functions, or module selftest

OFF

Executing citizenship tests

OFF

Internal loopback citizenship tests completed successfully

OFF

External loopback citizenship tests completed successfully

These sequences of LEOs should take fewer than 10 seconds. If the LEOs flash after this time, an
irrecoverable failure has occurred. See Table 8.

DELQA-12

DELQA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 8

Irrecoverable Failure Indications

LEDI

LED2

LED3

Failure Indication

OFF

Q-Bus failure

OFF

LANCE failure

OFF

68000 exception

Firmware fault

F indicates the LED is flashing.

Diagnostics for PDP-II Host Processors
Network Testing
•

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP)

•

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) running under Diagnostic Runtime Service (DRS)

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP) - Provides a command-driven interface for executing loopback
tests on the Ethernet, and for examining network and datalink counters.
Some of the relevant commands are:
•
•
•
•

LOOP
SHOW
TELL
TRIGGER.

The TRIGGER command may be used to initiate boot loading from the DELQA for PDP-II host systems
that have the appropriate boot ROM support.
The commands may be issued either from the local host system, or by using the TELL command, from a
remote node. The functions are performed concurrently with other DECnet operations and do not interfere
with other Ethernet traffic, although there may be some degradation of throughput.
For more information, refer to the DECnet-VAX System Manager's Guide.

DELQA-I3

DELQA DIAGNOSTICS

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) - Is used to:
•

Determine the connectivity of nodes on the Ethernet

•

Determine the ability of nodes to communicate with each other

•

Support node installation verification and problem isolation.

The NIE does not test the DELQA, but the <;ommunications link to which it is connected; therefore, the
NIE assumes that the DELQA has successfully completed the citizenship test.
The NIE is used with XXDP+ and the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor.
Refer to the DELQA User's Guide, Appendix B, for additional information.
Module Testing
•

Field functional diagnostic (ZQNA??) running under diagnostic runtime service (DRS)

•

DECjX 11 exerciser

PDP-ll Field Functional Diagnostic (ZQNA??) - Tests the DELQA in Q-Bus systems. It attempts to
isolate faults to the FRU.
Tests are executed under the supervision of the diagnostic runtime service (XXDP+) and are controlled by
an operator from a console.
ZQNA?? is not an Ethernet network exerciser, but verifies that the DELQA can execute Ethernet protocol,
and that valid network traffic can be transmitted and received.
ZQNA?? tests the DELQA in all loopback modes with or without an external loopback connector or
transceiver connected.
Externalloopback mode is used with a connected transceiver or externalloopback connector. Alternatively,
external loopback mode can be used with a terminated transceiver that is not attached to a network cable.
Executing ZQNA?? using externalloopback mode in a system connected to a live Ethernet does not disrupt
the Ethernet.
PDP-ll DECjXll Exerciser - Exercises one DELQA at maximum actIVIty rates. It transmits and
receives random-length packets (using either 18- or 22-bit physical address space). The DELQA transmits
and receives the same packet.

DELQA-14

DELQA DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics for MicroVAX Processors
Network Testing
•

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP)

•

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) running under the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Module Testing
•

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor - Offers the following menu-driven tests and utilities that may be run in
verify or service modes:
•

Utilities for external loopback tests and NIE

•

Service tests for external loopback

•

Verify tests for:
- Internal and internal extended loopback
- Set-up packet handling
- Buffer Descriptor List (BDL) handling
- DMA and interrupt handling
- Transmit and receive circuitry and firmware
- Address filtering

•

Device exerciser for testing the DELQA simultaneously with other system devices.

Troubleshooting
The general strategy for identifying a fault is:
I.

Check the DELQA configuration to ensure that the system can identify the module correctly

Run the module test(s) to check for faulty FRUs

Run the network test(s) to locate faults in the network configuration and/or operation.

DELQA-15

DELQA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Field Replaceable Units
Figure 4 shows the field replaceable units in the DELQA-M installation. Figure 5 shows the field replaceable
units in the DELQA-S installation.

Fuses
A 1.5 A/250 V Slo-Blo™ fuse (PN 90-07213) protects the transceiver and its associated external wiring.
This fuse is located in the bulkhead. The fuse may be replaced by:
•
•
•

Littlefuse™ type 31301.5,
BEL FUSE™ type 3SB1.5, or
An equivalent.

A 5.0 A/125 V axial lead picofuse (PN 12-05747-00) protects the DELQA module and internal wiring.
This fuse is soldered to the DELQA module and looks like a resistor.

ETHERNET

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

en
HOST SYSTEM

::::>

DELQA MODULE

CXl

BULKHEAD

TRANSCEIVER

D
FUSE
1.5 A

FUSE
5A

LED

MODULE
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR

LED

BULKHEAD
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
MKV88·1994

Figure 4

Field Replaceable Units for DELQA-M

Slo-Blo is a trademark of S.B. Fuses.
Littlefuse is a trademark of Littlefuse, Inc.
BEL FUSE is a trademark of Belfuse, Inc.

DELQA-16

DELQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Thickwire
ETHERNET

(f)

HOST
SYSTEM

TRANSCEIVER

::::)

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

a
DELQA
MODULE

FUSE
(1.5 A SB)

LED

BULKHEAD
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR

PICOFUSE (5 A)
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON CORRECT FUSE SEE SECTION "MAINTENANCE AIDS"
MKV88·1995

Figure 5

Field Replaceable Units for DELQA-S

DELQA-17

DELQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Citizenship Test Descriptions
Table 9 lists the host register RO bit combinations, the tests being run, and their meanings for the citizenship
test.
Table 9

Citizenship Test Error Status

RO Bit
Combinations

Test
No.

Description
Station Address Verification - Station address is all zeros or all ones, or is
not a valid DELQA address. If this test fails, testing continues until the
final external loopback test or another test failure occurs.

2,4

No interrupt, premature interrupt, wrong interrupt, or unexpected receive
interrupt.

12,01

Setup Mode and Receive Processing Test - Setup packet echoed data
check.

09,12,01

Setup Mode and Receive Processing Test - Setup packet operation
timeout.

14,12,01

Setup Mode and Receive Processing Test - Setup operation status check.

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - Transmit/receive data compare check.

09,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - True packet transmission
and receive error.

12,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - Setup packet echoed data
check.

14,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - False packet receive error.

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - General packet transmit/receive data compare check. Long packet not detected.

09,03

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - Test packet transmit or
receive timeout.

14,03

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - General operation status
check. Long packet not detected via operation status.

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Transmit (scatter/gather)
data check.

09,04

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Transmit (special) and receive
timeout.

14,04

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Receive or transmit operation
status check.

DELQA-18

DELQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 9

Citizenship Test Error Status (Cont)

RO Bit
Combinations

Test
No.

Description

Transceiver Operational and Status - Setup packet echo data check.

09,12

Transceiver Operational and Status - Setup packet operation timeout.

14,12

Transceiver Operational and Status - Setup packet operation status
check.

7,8

CSR carrier bit on too long.

7,8

External loop back not operational.

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - External loopback
transmitted/received packet data compare check.

09,05

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - Externalloopback operation timeout.

14,05

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - Externalloopback operation status check.

Table 10 shows the LED display results for the citizenship test.
Table to

Citizenship Test LED Results

LEDt LED2 LED3 Meaning
OFF

OFF

Citizenship test passed successfully

OFF

External loopback test failed

OFF

DELQA internal error

Cannot upline load the BD ROM contents,
or the first set-up packet prefill failed.

DELQA-19

DELQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP)
In normal mode, the DELQA implements MOP functions in response to -the following remote console
messages from other nodes on the Ethernet.
•

Request system ID message - The DELQA responds by transmitting its current system 10
message.

•

Remote boot trigger instruction - The DELQA may respond to a trigger instruction only if option
switch S4 is open to enable remote boot. The instruction can be implemented only if the host
system has the appropriate boot ROM.

•

Loopback request message - The DELQA will respond to a loopback request message.

The DELQA also transmits its current system 10 parameters automatically every 8 to 10 minutes.
For more information, refer to the DECnet maintenance operation protocol (MOP) functional specification.
IEEE 802.3 Network Support
In normal mode, the DELQA implements IEEE 802.3 logical link control messages when they are received
on a null Link-layer Service Access Point (LSAP) within an 802.3 standard local area network.
These messages can be used to interrogate and test many link layer service points per node. Therefore, IEEE
802.3 logical link control messages, which are received on a non-NULL LSAp, are passed on the the host
system as normal datagrams.
For details on this message format and protocol, refer to the ANSI/IEEE Draft International Standard
802.2 Logical Link Control.

DELQA-20

DELUA INSTALLATION
DELUA ETHERNET UNIBUS ADAPTOR
General Description
The DIGITAL Ethernet large-scale-integration UNIBUS adaptor (DELUA) is a data communications
controller that is used to connnect UNIBUS-based processors to the Ethernet ntitwork or Ethernetcompatible networks.
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following manuals for more information on the DELUA adaptor.
Title

Document Number

DELUA Technical Description

EK-DELUA-TD

DELUA User's Guide

EK-DELUA-UG

H4000 Technical Description

EK-H4000-TD

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

DELUA Adaptor Components List
The following list describes the parts supplied with each DELUA adaptor and how to unpack and inspect
them.
•

Static Discharge System Setup
Unpack a VELOSTATTM static discharge system, CD kit A2-W0299-10.
Unfold the VELOSTATTM mat.
Attach the 15-ft ground cable to the mat snap fastener.
Attach the 15-ft ground cable alligator clip to a good electrical ground point in the host
computer.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to the wrist and the other end to a convenient of the
mat.

•

Unpacking and Inspection
CAUTION
The DELUA M7521 module and the UNA bulkhead
assembly must be unpacked and inspected on a static
discharge system mat.
Inspect the unopened DELUA shipping container and check it for dents, holes, or crushed
corners.
Open and unpack the shipping container, and inventory the contents against the DELUA
components parts diagram.
Inspect the DELUA module for shipping damage. Refer to the Site Preparation/ Installation Guide for damage reporting.

Velostat is a trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.

DELUA-l

DELUA INSTALLATION
Device Placement
The DELUA adaptor requires a hex-height small peripheral controlfer (SPC) backplane slot. Any SPC
backplane (DDll-B, Rev E or later) can accept the DELUA adaptor module.
To prevent adverse bus latency, the DELUA adaptor should be placed on the UNIBUS conductor before
all devices that have a lower DMA transfer rate and before all UNIBUS repeaters.
Installation Procedure
The DELUA installation procedures are detailed in the installation flowchart (Figure 1). If additional
information is required refer to the following documents.
Title

Document Number

Ethernet Installation Guide
DELUA User's Guide

EK-ETHER-IN
EK-DELUA-UG

GET DELUA
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
APPROPRIATE
PERSONNEL.

WHAT HOST SYSTEM?
HOW MANY?
WHICH BACKPLANE SLOTS?

COMPLETE
PREINSTALLATION
PROCEDURES.
SEE PAGE 2.

--{:

SPC SLOT SELECTIONS
BUS LATENCY CONSTRAINTS
BACKPLANE CONFIGURATION

SET UP STATIC
DISCHARGE SYSTEM.
SEE PAGE 1.

UNPACKING AND
INSPECTING.
SEE PAGE 1.

MKV86-0199

Figure I

DELUA Installation Flowchart (Sheet I of 4)

DELUA-2

DELUA INSTALLATION

SET ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK E1 06
TO ADDRESS 774510.
SEE FIGURE 2.

SET VECTOR ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK E69
SWITCHES 4-10
TO ADDRESS 120.
SEE FIGURE 4.

,..S-E-T-A-D-D-R-E-S.l..- - - - - - , *SEE NOTE
S
SWITCH PACK E106 ON
2ND AND CONSECUTIVE
DELUA/DEUNA
MODULES TO APPROPRIATE FLOATING
.ADDRESS. SEE FIGURE 3.

SET VECTOR ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK E69
SWITCHES 4-10 ON 2ND
AND CONSECUTIVE
DELUA/DEUNA
MODULES TO APPROPRIATE FLOATING
VECTOR. SEE FIGURE 5.

SET SWITCHES 2&3
OF SWITCH PACK E69
FOR DESIRED
BOOT OPTION.
SEE FIGURE 5.
SEE TABLE 1.
*NOTE:
SEE APPENDIX A OF DELUA USER'S GUIDE
(EK-DELUA-UG) FOR FLOATING ADDRESS AND
VECTOR INFORMATION.
MKV86-0189

Figure 1 DELUA Installation Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 4)

DELUA-3

DELUAINSTALLATION

SET SELF-TEST LOOP
SWITCH 1 ON
SWITCHPACK E69 TO
THE ON (DISABLED)
POSITION. SEE
FIGURE 4.

PLUG THE KEYED UNA
CABLE ASSEMBLY
BERG'· CONNECTOR
INTO J3 ON THE
M7521 MODULE.

INSTALL THE M7521
DELUA MODULE INTO
THE SELECTED
BACKPLANE SLOT.

ROUTE TH E UNA
CABLE THROUGH THE
CABINET CABLEWAYS
TO THE BACK OF THE
SYSTEM CABINET.

BERG IS A TRADEMARK OF BERG ELECTRONICS, INC.
MKV86·0500

Figure 1 DELUA Installation Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 4)

DELUA-4

DELUA INSTALLATION

INSTALL THE QUAD
FRAME ON THE
CABINET UPRIGHT
WITH 10-32 BOLTS
(90-06073-03) AND
TINNERMAN NUTS
(90-07786-00).

REMOVE A BLANK
PANEL FROM THE I/O
BULKHEAD AND
INSTALL THE UNA
BULKHEAD ASSEMBLY
WITH TH E 4 CAPTIVE
SCREWS.
A

INSTALL THE UNA
BULKHEAD ASSEMBLY
ON THE I/O QUAD
FRAME AND SECURE
WITH THE 4 CAPTIVE
SCREWS (12-19534-01).

UNLOCK THE LATCH
ON THE UNA
BULKHEAD CABLE
ASSEMBLY
D-CONNECTOR.

CONNECT THE
D-CONNECTOR TO J2
ON THE BACK
(COMPONENT SIDE)
OF THE UNA
BULKHEAD ASSEMBLY.

SLIDE THE LATCH ON
THE D-CONNECTOR
TO THE LOCKED
POSITION.

MKV85·2700

Figure 1 DELUA Installation Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 4)

DELUA-5

DELUA INSTALLATION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10 (A3)
9 (A4)
S (A5)
' " - - - 7 (A6)
' - - - - - - 6 (A7)
L . . -_ _ _ _ 5 (AS)

' " - - - - - 4 (A9)
' - - - - - - - 3 (Al0)
L - -_ _ _ _ _ 2 (All)
L . . . - - - - - - - l (A 12)
MKV86-0501

Figure 2 M7521 Address Switchpack Location (E106)

DELUA-6

DELUA INSTALLATION

LSB

MSB
15

SWITCH
NUMBER

12111110 1 9

1 a l 71

6 1 5 1 4 1 3

SWITCHPACK El06

OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF

FLOATING
ADDRESS
760010
760020
760030
760040
760050
760060
760070
760100

OFF

760200

OFF OFF

760300

760400

OFF

760500

OFF OFF

760600

OFF OFF OFF

760700

761000

OFF

762000

OFF OFF

763000

76400

OFF

MKV86-0502

Figure 3 M7521 Floating Address Assignment Table

DELUA-7

DELDA INSTALLATION

1 (SELF-TEST LOOP) ON
2 (BOOT SELO)
3 (BOOT SEL 1)

MKV86-0503

Figure 4

M7251 Vector Address, Boot Sel and Self-Test Switchpack (E69)

DELDA-8

DELUA INSTALLATION

SWITCH
NUMBER

SWITCHPACK E69

OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

FLOATING
10 VECTOR
300
304
310
314
320
324
330
334
340
344
350
354
360
364
370
374
400

OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

OFF

500

OFF OFF

600

OFF OFF OFF

700

MKV86-0504

Figure 5

M7521 Floating Vector Address Assignment Table

)
DELUA-9

DELUA INSTALLATION

Installation Verification

The installation verification procedure is performed with an Ethernet transceiver, DELNI unit, or H4080
loopback test transceiver connected to the DELUA UNA bulkhead assembly. The flowchart in Figure 6
details the verification procedure.

POST INSTALLATION
REMOVE NPG JUMPER
ON BACKPLANE.
POWER CHECK.
TURN SYSTEM POWER
ON.

PERFORM SYSTEM
POWER CHECKS.

LED CHECKS.
TURN SYSTEM
POWER OFF.

SET UP TRANSCEIVER
OR LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR AS
SHOWN IN
FIGURE 7.

TURN SYSTEM
POWER ON AND WAIT
MINIMUM OF 15
SECONDS.

MKV86·0505

Figure 6 DELUA Installation Verification Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 2)

DELUA-IO

DELUA INSTALLATION

03 OFF. LEOs
I NCREM ENTI NG.
CHECK SWITCH 1
ON E69.

CHECK CABLING.
CHECK SYSTEM
POWER.

MKV86·0506

Figure 6

DELUA Installation Verification Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 2)

Table 1 Switchpack E69 Switch Settings
E69-2
Boot Sel 0

E69-3
Boot Sell

Function Selected

On*
Off
On
Off**

On*
On
Off
Off**

Remote boot disable
Remote boot with system load
Remote with ROM
Remote boot disable

* Switch settings for DELUA installed in a VAX-II system.
** Switch settings for DELUA installed in a PDP-II system.

Table 2

Backplane Pin Voltage Checks

Backplane
Pin

Nominal

Voltage
Maximum
Minimum

CA2

+5.0 V

+5.25 V

+4.75 V

FB2

-15.0 V

-15.75 V

-14.25 V

~\
I

DELUA-ll

DELUA INSTALLATION

UNA BULKHEAD
ASSEMBLY

PIN: 70-18799-00

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
(TEFLON) BNE2A-XX
(PVC) BNE2B-XX

MKV85-0325

Figure 7 DELUA Microdiagnostics Self-Test Configuration

DELUA-12

DELUA INSTALLATION

~GftWGftW ~
NOTE

D3 D5

LED D2 IS NOT USED.
MKV86·0507

Figure 8 M7521 LED Location

MKV85·0327

Figure 9

UNA Bulkhead Assembly LED Location

)
DELUA-13

DELUA CABLING
Cabling
This section contains the cabling diagram for the DELUA adaptor.

BULKHEAD
CABLE ASSEMBLY

BULKHEAD
ASSEMBLY

FROM TRANSCEIVER

M7521
MODULE

o
o

BULKHEAD
FRAME
74-27292-01
(FOR USE
WITH FCCCOMPLIANT
CABINETS)

MKV86'0508

Figure 10 DELUA Cabling

DELUA-14

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS
DELUA Diagnostics
Maintenance Features
•

Hardware Self-Test
Initiated on powerup, or
When the user issues a SELF-TEST port command (3 octal) to PCSRO <3:0>

•

LED Indicators
Self-Test Failure
State/Status Indicators
Microcode Failure Indicators

•

Diagnostic Testing
DELUA VAX-lIOn-Line Functional Diagnostics (EVOYB*)
OELUA PDP-II Functional Diagnostic (CZUAD*)
VAX-ll/PDP-ll NI Exerciser (EVDWC*/CZUAC*)
DEC/XII DELUA Module (CXUAD*)

Self-Test Procedures
The DELUA self-test is a ROM-based test that verifies the:
•

Operation of the five subsystems of the DELUA adaptor

•

Integrity of the cable signal path from the DELUA adaptor to the transceiver.

The self-test is initiated:
•

On powerup, or

•

When the user issues a SELF-TEST port command (3 octal) to PCSRO <3:0>.

Self-test takes approximately 15 seconds to execute. During this time, the seven fault/status LEOs on the
M7521 module will be cycling, indicating that the self-test is in progress.
On completion of the self-test, the LEDs will stop blinking and will indicate:
•

Which self-test failed, or

•

The DELUA state/status (LED D8 is ON and LED 05 may be blinking).

)

DELUA-I5

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 3 M7521 LEDs Self-Test Failure Indications
D3

Test Failed

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

ROM test
RAM checkerboard test
Instruction set test
RAM test
RAM parity memory test
CPU exception test
RAM parity interrupt test
Physical address ROM test
Timer interrupt test

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

LANCE internal loopback
LANCE IBUS parity test
LANCE CRC logic test
LANCE collision detect
LANCE multicast address
LANCE broadcast address
LANCE physical address reject
LANCE external loopback

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

DMA block mover I-Bus address register test
DMA block mover H-Bus address register bit
Block mover word count register bit
DMA word mover H-Bus address register bit
Block mover I-Bus test
DMA UNIBUS access test
DMA UNIBUS access test
DMA word mover data register bit test
Word mover PCSRO test
Word mover PCSR 1,2,3
DMA block mover H-Bus to I-Bus test
DMA block mover I-Bus to H-Bus test
Port command interlock
LUNA I-Bus loading test

NOTE
ON equals a logical "I."

DELUA-16

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 4 M7521 State/Status Indicators
D3

State/Status

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Reset state
Primary load state
Ready state
Running state
Not used
UNIBUS halted state
Ethernet halted state
Ethernet and UNIBUS halted state
Port halted state
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Secondary load state

NOTES
D5 is Activity LED.
ON equals logical "I."

Table 5

M7521 Microcode Failure Indicators

Fault Indication

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Unsolicited trap occurred
LANCE interrupt, No bits set in CSRO
Lance memory error
Parity error
Port command 0 interrupt
Transmit error
MOP error
Receive error, Queue from empty queue
Receive error, Bad buffer returned
Receive error, Bad buffer queued

NOTE
ON equals logical "I."

)
DELUA-17

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic Description
The DELUA diagnostics consist of the following:
•
•
•
•

EVDYB - VAX-lIOn-Line Functional Diagnostic
CZUAD - PDP-II Functional Diagnostic
EVDWC/CZUAC - VAX-ll/PDP-ll NI Exerciser
CXUAD - DEC/XII DELUA Module.

EVDYB VAX-ll On-Line Functional Diagnostic
The VAX-ll on-line diagnostic (EVDYB) is used to verify functional operation of the DELUA adaptor,
and test all DELUA hardware functions the DELUA is capable of using. It is a VAX/VMS level 2R
(on-line) diagnostic that runs under the VAX-II diagnostic supervisor. For this diagnostic to run, DECnet
and LAT must be shut off.
Table 6 lists and describes the tests performed by EVDYB.

Table 6 EVDYB VAX-ll On-Line Functional Diagnostic Test Summary
Test

Description
Read Internal ROM

The internal 16K byte ROM can be read, and there are no
CRC errors.

Read/Write Internal
RAM

Data patterns can be written and read from internal RAM
memory.

Transmit CRC

Transmit CRC logic functions properly.

Receive CRC

Receive CRC logic functions properly.

Promiscuous Address

DELUA is in promiscuous mode and will accept all datagrams
regardless of the destination address.

Enable All Multicast

DELUA is in enable .all multicast mode and will accept all
datagrams with multicast destination addresses.

Station Address

DELUA recognizes the physical, multicast, and broadcast
addresses of the node and discards datagrams with non-enabled addresses.

No Receive Buffers
Available

The appropriate error will be flagged if a loop back is
attempted and there are no receive buffers owned by the
DELUA.

DELUA Stress

DELUA functions properly during heavy traffic loading
conditions.

DELUA-I8

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS
CZAUD PDP-ll Functional Diagnostic
The PDP-11 functional diagnostic (CZUAD) verifies the operation of the DELUA adaptors that have
been installed in a PDP-II processor. CZUAD runs under the PDP-II diagnostic supervisor in a
standalone, off-line environment.
Table 7 lists and describes the tests performed by CZUAD.
Table 7 CZUAD PDP-ll Functional Diagnostic Test Summary
Description

Test

l.I

PCSRO Read Access

A device is present at the PCSRO UNIBUS address specified.

PCSR I Read Access

A device is present at the PCSR I UNIBUS address specified.

PCSR1 DELUA ID Bit

Neither bit <06> nor other bits in PCSR1 device ID field are
set.

PCSR2 Read Access

A device is present at the PCSR2 UNIBUS address specified.

PCSR3 Read Access

A device is present at the PCSR3 UNIBUS address specified.

PCSR2 Static Bit

PCSR2 for all STUCK-AT-O (SAO) and STUCK-AT-1 (SAl)
errors. The host will write patterns to PCSR2, and read them
back.

PCSR3 Static Bit

PCSR3 for all SAO and SAl errors. The host will write patterns to PCSR3 and read them back.

Self-Test

The ROM-based self-test can be run successfully when
invoked via the SELF-TEST port command.

Port Command

No errors occur when a DELUA port command is issued.

Interrupt Logic

A DELUA interrupt can be generated.

Read Internal ROM

Internal ROM can be read.

Read/Write Internal
Memory

Internal RAM can be written and read.

Internal Loopback

No errors occur when a datagram is transmitted and received
in internal loopback mode.

CRC Checking

CRC checking logic is operational.

Force CRC Error

CRC error detection is operational.

No Receive Buffer

A receive buffer error (RCBI) can be generated.

Disable Receive
Chaining

Disable receive chaining mode is operational.

DELUA-19

DELUA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 7 CZUAD PDP-ll Functional Diagnostic Test Summary (Cont)
Test

Description

Transmit Chaining
Error

Buffer length error can be set in the transmit descriptor ring.

Data Chaining

Transmit and receive data chaining.

Physical Address

Physical address detection is operational.

Multicast Address

Multicast address detection is operational.

Promiscuous Address

DELUA in promiscuous mode will accept all frames regardless of the destination mode.

Enable All Multicast

DELUA in multicast mode will accept all frames with multicast destination addresses.

Internal Loopback
Transmit Length
Error

If port driver attempts to transmit greater than a 32 byte
<DCTR=O> or 36 byte <DCTR=I> transmit frame, the
device will return a transmit length error.

Simultaneous
Operations

Simultaneous operations can be performed.

External Loopback
(Manual Intervention
Required)

Using an externalloopback connector, it ensures that no errors
occur when a datagram is transmitted and received in external
loopback mode.

Print Device
Parameters

Prints the default physical address, the microcode revision,
and the switch pack settings.

DELUA-20

DELDA MAINTENANCE AIDS
EVDWC/CZDAC Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE)
The Network interconnect exerciser (NIE) allows nodes on the Ethernet LAN to communicate with each
other. It consists of two operational modes:
•
•

Default or operator-directed
Unattended.

The default section allows the operator to select different modes of operation, such as:
•
•
•

SIZE NI
USE LOOP ASSIST
FULL ASSISTANCE TEST OF ALL NODES.

This section is operator-driven, allowing the operator to select tests and test parameters.
The unattended mode collects a table of node addresses and tests the selected nodes, using the low-level
maintenance functions of the specified controller.
CXUAD DEC/Xll DELDA Module
CXUAD sustains maximum bus activity for a period of time by transmitting multiple frames on each
iteration. At the start of each pass, the program allocates a number of transmit buffers. A table is
generated, which contains for each frame:
•
•
•

Starting address
Byte count
Expected CRC.

Receive buffers are are allocated to align with the transmit buffers, allowing for header, data, and CRC
verification.
In each iteration, two frames are transmitted in the normal mode. The purpose of these frames is to
generate UNIBUS activity. No attempt is made to check received data. After transmission of these
frames, the operating mode is changed to internalloopback and 32 short (36-byte) frames are transmitted.
Received frames, status, and data are verified.
NOTE
The DELDA adaptor supports internal loopback
only. Externalloopback mode use during DEC/Xll
will cause errors and be detrimental to network
operations.

"")

DELUA-21

DELUA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting Flowchart
DELUA troubleshooting is detailed in the flowchart on the next two pages (Figure 11).

CHECK
1) TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
2) BULKHEAD CABLE

YES

1) CHECK BULKHEAD
CIRCUIT BREAKER
OR FUSE
2) CHECK/REPLACE:
• BULKHEAD CABLE
• -15 V POWER
SUPPLY

RESEAT
1) TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
2) BULKHEAD CABLE
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 3

RUN FUNCTIONAL

SEE NOTE 1

SEE NOTE 2

MKV86-0509

Figure 11

DELUA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 2)

DELUA-22

DELUA MAINTENANCE AIDS

NOTE 1:
ON VAX SYSTEMS RUNNING
VMS, RUN ON-LINE FUNCTIONAL
DIAGNOSTICS FIRST.

RUN EXTERNAL
LOOPBACK TEST
OF FUNCTIONALS

NOTE 2:
IF THE FAILED TEST IS
OTHER THAN AN EXTERNAL
LOOPBACK FAILURE, THE MOST
LIKELY FAILED FRU IS THE M7521 MODULE
NOTE 3:
I F THE FAI LED TEST IS THE
EXTERNAL LOOPBACK TEST,
THEN THE ORDER OF FRU
REPLACEMENT IS:
A) TRANSCEIVER CABLE
B) BULKHEAD CABLE
C) BULKHEAD CONNECTOR
D) M7521 MODULE

RECONNECT
HARDWARE
TO NETWORK

RUN USER'S
OPERATING
SYSTEM

REFER PROBLEM
TO NETWORK
SERVICE PEOPLE

YES

(

EXIT)
MKV86·0510

Figure 11

DELUA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 2)

\/
DELUA-23

DELUA MAINTENANCE AIDS
DELUA Tech Tips/FCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DELUA Ethernet UNIBUS adaptor.
Table 8

DELUA Tech Tips/FCO Index

Tech
Tip No.

Title

Speed
Bulletin

TT04A

DELUA ESD Precautions

442

DELUA-24

DEMPR INSTALLATION
DEMPR MULTIPORT REPEATER
General Description
The DEMPR is a ThinWire repeater that connects eight ThinWire coaxial cable segments, each up to
185 m (607 ft) in length. Up to 29 stations can be daisy-chained on each segment. The DEMPR can be used
as a standalone network hub or connected to a standard Ethernet or IEEE 802-.3 "backbone." There are two
versions of the DEMPR:
•
•

DEMPR-AA, 110 Vac
DEMPR-AB, 220 Vac

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information regarding the DEMPR.

)

•

DEMPR Installation User's Guide

EK-DEMPR-UG

•

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.3 ThinWire Repeaters(DEMPR/ DESPR)
Technical Manual

EK~ THNRP-TM

•

DECconnect System General Description

EK-DECSY-GD

•

DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook

EK-DECSY-EG

•

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

•

DECconnect System Installation and Verification Guide

EK-DECSY-VG

•

H4000- TA Ethernet Transceiver Tester User's Guide

EK-ETHTT-UG

•

DECconnect System ThinWire Planning and Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-IG

•

Thin Wire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Connector Installation Card

EK-CABLE-IN

ThinWire and Standard Ethernet Differences
The major differences are:
•

Thin Wire coaxial cable is used instead of Ethernet coaxial cable.

•

ThinWire compatible equipment uses BNe connectors instead of N-connectors.

•

ThinWire stations interconnect with DESTA station adapters or directly to the ThinWire
coaxial cable via BNC TEE connectors instead of H4000 transceivers.

•

ThinWire repeater is a DEMPR instead of a DEREP.

DEMPR-l

DEMPR INSTALLATION

Repeater Configuration Limitations
Standalone DEMPR •

One to eight ThinWire coaxial cable segments can be attached to a DEMPR.

•

Each coaxial cable segment can be up to 185 m (607 ft) long.

•

Stations can be attached directly to the cable using TEE connectors. TEE connectors plug
directly into the station.

•

There must be at least 0.5 m (1.6 ft) between ThinWire station connections.

•

There can be up to 29 stations per coaxial cable segment. .

•

TEE connectors cannot be directly attached to DEMPR ports.

DEMPR

I...

185 M (607 F~
MAXIMUM

1/
CABLE
SEGMENTS

I...

-I

0.5 M (1.6 FTj
MINIMUM

UP TO 29 STATIONS PER CABLE SEGMENT
MKV87-1270

Figure 1 Standalone DEMPR with ThinWire Cables

DEMPR-2

DEMPR INSTALLATION
Standalone Cascading DEMPR •

The DEMPR is connected to the ThinWire cable via a DESTA transceiver.

•

A single DEMPR coaxial cable segment is used to allow up to 29 DEMPR multiport repeaters to
be attached via DESTA station adapters.
NOTE
When, connecting a DEMPR to a DESTA, the
switches on the DESTA unit must be set in the
DOWN position (away from the dimple).

•

Only two repeaters* (DEMPR, DESPR, or DEREP) are allowed between any two stations on the
Ethernet network.

DEMPR

..
I

185 M (607 FT)
.....------MAXIMUM - - - - - - - - '

1+-_ _ 0.5 M (1.6 FT)~

MINIMUM
DESTA

DESTA
1..-_ _ 5 TO 50 M

(16.5 TO 165 FT)

DEMPR

WITH DEMPR MULTI PORT REPEATERS
UP TO 29 DESTA STATION ADAPTERS
MKV86-0587

Figure 2 Standalone Cascading DEMPR with Multiport Repeaters

* Ethernet timing starts again at a LAN Bridge. This means that it is possible to have more than two
repeaters between stations when remote bridges are used. No more than two repeaters may be placed
between the bridges.

DEMPR-3

DEMPR INSTALLATION

Standalone DELNI with DEMPR Multiport Repeaters -

•

With the use of a loopback connector (PIN 12-22196-01) on the DELNI, a user can connect up
to eight DEMPR multi port repeaters using 5 to 50 m (16.5 to 165 ft) of transceiver cable for
each DEMPR.

•

Only two DEMPR multiport repeaters* are allowed between any two stations.

•

The DELNI is configured in GLOBAL mode with a loopback connector installed.

DELNI
5 TO 50 M
(16.5 TO 165 FT)

DEMPR

MKV86-0588

Figure 3 Standalone DELNI with DEMPR Multiport Repeaters

DEMPR INSTALLATION
~

DEMPR on a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable •

A DEMPR can be connected to a standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 cable by a 5 to 50 m
(16.5 to 165 ft) transceiver cable and a transceiver.

•

One to eight Thin Wire Ethernet coaxial segments can be attached to a DEMPR.

•

Other repeaters, such as the DEREP, may be attached to the standard Ethernet backbone.

•

Only two repeaters are allowed between any two stations within a LAN (Local Area Network).

•

Multiple DEMPR repeaters can be connected to the standard Ethernet backbone via an H4000
or H4005 transceiver with heartbeat disabled. (The two repeater* rule applies.)
500 M (1 641FT)
~-----------MAXIMUM

-------------,

STANDARD ETHERNET OR IEEE 802.3 COAXIAL CABLE

I.. 2.5 M (8.2 FT)-I

UPTO 100
TRANSCEIVERS

INCREMENTS

185 M (607 FT)
MAXIMUM

DEMPR
(REPEATER)

UP TO 29 STATIONS PER
ThinWire CABLE SEGMENT

0.5 M (1.6 FT)
MINIMUM
MKV89-0003

Figure 4

DEMPR on a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DEMPR-5

DEMPR INSTALLATION
DEMPRjDELNI Pyramids on a Standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 Coaxial Segment •

DEREP repeaters can be used on the standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 backbone as long as no
more than two repeaters* are between any two stations.

•

Multiple DEMPRjDELNI pyramids can be hooked up to a standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3
backbone via transceivers (see Figure 5). In this case, the backbone is limited to 300 m (984 ft).

•

The H4000-BA (or equivalent) or H4005 with heartbeat disabled can be used to hook up
DEMPRjDELNI pyramids to the backbone.
NOTE
When connecting to an "4005 transceiver, the
switches on the "4005 unit must be set in the
DOWN position (away from the dimple).

•

When a DELNI is installed between a transceiver and a DEMPR (see Figure 5), the combined
lengths of the transceiver cable between the transceiver and the DELNI, and between the DELNI
and the DEMPR, must not exceed 45 m (148 ft) . The DELNI consumes 5 m (16.5 ft) of the
usual cable allowance of 50 m (165 ft).

•

Standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 backbone segments using multiple pyramids are limited to
300 m (984 ft) lengths instead of the usual 500 m (1641 ft).

•

Only two DEMPR multi port repeaters are allowed between any two stations.

•

A DELNI-to-DELNI-to-DEMPR configuration is not allowed. If a DELNI has a DEMPR
attached to one of its local connectors (ports), the global connector (port) of the DELNI must
attach directly to the standard Ethernet via a transceiver or have a loopback connector attached to
its global port. The DELNI must be placed in GI,-OBAL mode.

•

The DELNI used in this configuration does not pass heartbeat to any of its ports. For example, a
DEUNA expects to receive heartbeat each time it transmits a message. In the DEMPRjDELNI
configuration, this will not occur and error counters will be incremented.
NOTE
When a DEMPR is connected to a DELNI, no other
device which expects a heartbeat can be connected to
the DELNI.

•

Additional coaxial segments [up to 500 m (1641 ft)] can be connected to the standard Ethernet or
IEEE 802.3 backbone using a repeater (provided that the two repeater* rule is enforced).

DEMPR-6

DEMPR INSTALLATION

)
.--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 300 M (9843 FT) SEGMENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _----.
(MAXIMUM)

1
:4:

---

H4000-BA OR H4005 (WITH HEARTBEAT DISABLED)

7/r/------~
COMBINED LENGTH ~
MUST NOT EXCEED
45 M (147.6 FT)
I

DEMPR

--I

\ ..
2.5 M (8.2 FT)
MINIMUM

UP TO 100
TRANSCEIVERS

DELNI

DEMPR

)

DEMPR

MKV89-0002

Figure 5 DEMPR/DELNI Combination on a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DEMPR-7

DEMPR INSTALLATION
DEMPR Component List
The following parts are supplied with each repeater.
Table 1

DEMPR Parts List
AA
Version

17-00083-07

See Table 2

Loopback terminator

12-22196-01

Terminator

H8225

Cab mounting brackets

H041-AA

DEMPR Installation/User's Guide

EK-DEMPR-UG

Thin Wire Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Connector Installation Card

EK -CABLE-IN

Description

Part
Designation

DEMPR-AA or -AB

DEMPR-nn*

Power cord

Version

*nn = version -AA or -AB
The DEMPR-AB (220 V) version requires a power cord specific to individual countries. The following
table lists power cord requirements for specific countries.
Table 2

Country Power Cords

Country

Order Code

Ireland, United Kingdom

BN02A-2E

Austria, Belgium, Czechoslovakia, Finland,
France, Germany, Hungary, Netherlands,
Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden

BN03A-2E

Switzerland

BN04A-2E

Australia, New Zealand

BN05A-2E

Denmark

BN06A-2E

Italy

BN07A-2E

DEMPR-8

DEMPR INSTALLATION

DEMPR
MULTIPORT
REPEATER

€> EO
0- [!)
TERMINATOR
H8225

)

€)a

INSTALLATION/USER'S
GUIDE

€)a

I!D

CAB MOUNT
BRACKETS
POWER CORD

LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
12-221 96-01

MKV87-1273

Figure 6

DEMPR Thin Wire Multipart Repeater

DEMPR-9

DEMPR INSTALLATION

System Placement
The DEMPR can be located in any convenient location. Typical locations might include:
•
•
•

A table,
A rack mount assembly, or
A wall mount (The H039 wall mount bracket must be ordered separately).
WARNING
The DEMPR cannot be wall mounted with the I/O
panel side facing downward.

Power Requirements
The operating range of the DEMPR is contained in the following table.

Table 3

DEMPR Power Requirements

Nominal
Voltage
Required

Voltage
Range

Current*

Frequency

120 Vac

88-132 V

47-63 Hz

240 Vac

176-264 V

47-63 Hz

*When operating at nominal voltage specified.

Physical Specifications
DEMPR without plastic cover:
Length - 43.19 cm (17.0 in)
Width - 29.84 cm (11.75 in)
Height - 8.74 cm (3.44 in)
Weight - 7 pounds 11 ounces
DEMPR with plastic cover:
Length - 48.9 em (19.25 in)
Width - 31.11 em (12.25 in)
Height - 11.43 em (4.5 in)
Weight - 11 pounds 14 ounces

DEMPR-I0

(

DEMPR INSTALLATION

Environmental Specifications

Operating Temperature Ranges
With plastic enclosure: 10° - 40°C (50° - 104°F)
Without plastic enclosure: 5° - 50°C (41 ° - 122°F)
Preinstallation Considerations

Consider the following prior to initiating installation of the DEMPR unit. Ensure that:
1.

An ac power outlet is within 1.83 m (6 ft) of the installation location.

A suitable platform on which to table-top mount the DEMPR unit is available.

Suitable cabling and transceivers are available (as required and that have been tested) to
interconnect the DEMPR units to both the standard Ethernet and ThinWire Ethernet devices.

A clearance of 10.16 cm (4 in) be maintained between all sides of the DEMPR unit and
obstructions to allow for proper ventilation.

The network being configured for the ThinWire DEMPR is within allowable limits (refer to the
DECconnect Planning and Configuration Guide).

)

DEMPR-ll

DEMPR INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (SEE
FIGURE 6)

REMOVE COVER,
MOUNT BRACKETS
(SEE FIGURE 9)

REPLACE

MKV87·1274

Figure 7

DEMPR Installation Flow Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 3)
DEMPR-12

DEMPR INSTALLATION

VERIFY THAT ALL
TERMINATORS.
CABLES. AND
LOOPBACK
CONNECTORS ARE
REMOVED (LEAVE
POWER CORD
CONNECTED)

REPLACE

)

REPLACE

RUNNING THE SELF-TEST ON AN UNTERMINATED PORT VERIFIES
THAT THE COLLISION PRESENCE LOGIC WORKS.
A PROPERLY TERMINATED COAXIAL MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR
THE 50 OHM TERMINATOR.
MKV86-0592

Figure 7 DEMPR Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

\,
/

DEMPR-13

DEMPR INSTALLATION

INSTALL LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
12-22196-01 ON
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE PORT

REPLACE

REMOVE LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR AND
CONNECT
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE'"

CONNECT ThinWire
COAXIAL CABLE TO

ATTACHING A STANDARD ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER, SUCH AS AN
H4000, CAN CAUSE THE DEMPR TO EXECUTE SELF-TEST.

MKV87·1275

Figure 7

DEMPR Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

DEMPR-14

DEMPR INSTALLATION

)

LEGEND

:it TRANSCEIVER CABLE PORT
(l)
@
~

SELF-TEST
POWER
CARRIER

CARRIER
SENSE
LED

)

I~~O "~~~l!~~~~~~~
POWER
LED

TYPICAL
SEGMENT
LED
(1 OF 9)

SELF-TEST/STATUS LED
PUSHBUTTON

MKV87-1276

Figure 8 DEMPR Rear Panel

DEMPR-15

DEMPR INSTALLATION

Figure 9

ack Mounted DEMPR

DEMPR-16

MKV86·0595

DEMPR CABLING

Connections
) Cable
Three types of cable must be considered when connecting a DEMPR.
•

Transceiver cable - Up to 50 m (164 ft) if going directly to a transceiver; 45 m (148 ft) total if
using a DELNI.

•

ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable(s) - Up to eight, each up to 185 m (607 ft) maximum.

•

Power - Outlet must be within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the DEMPR.

ETHERNET OR IEEE 802.3 NETWORK

POWER
RECEPTACLE

)

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

FIRST
DESTA

THINWIRE
ETHERNET
CABLE
MKV89-0001

Figure 10

DEMPR Cable Connections

\
DEMPR-17

DEMPR CABLING

Thin Wire Cabling
ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cables transfer data over shorter distances. Typically, ThinWire core OD is
0.116 inches while standard core OD is about 0.242 inches. There are two types of ThinWire coaxial
cable:
•

ThinWire Ethernet FEP (Fluoropolymer) coaxial cable, PIN H8244-A (1000 ft roll)

•

ThinWire Ethernet PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) coaxial cable, PIN H8243-A (1000 ft roll)
NOTE
It is recommended that all connectors and terminators used on ThinWire cabling use gold-plated
center conductors.

STANDARD ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

ThinWire ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

MKV86·0512

Figure 11

Cable Differences

DEMPR-18

(

DEMPR CABLING
ThinWire Coaxial Cable Segment Cabling Guidelines

)

•

Thin Wire segments may be no longer than 185 m (607 ft).

•

Up to 30 stations are supported (DEMPR counts as 1).

•

A ThinWire segment can have no more than 60 male/female connector junctions (see Figure
12 item # I or #2; each counts as a junction). The barrel connector counts as two junctions.

•

The ThinWire coaxial cable must be terminated at both ends with 50-ohm terminators. Terminators attach via a TEE or barrel connector. (The DEMPR has an internal terminator.)

•

The third connection point of a TEE connector must not be terminated (see Figure 12 item #3).

•

No coaxial cable may be placed between the TEE connector and the DESTA or ThinWire
station. The TEE connector (see Figure 12, item #3) attaches directly to the DESTA or station.

•

TEE connectors cannot connect directly to DEMPR ports.

•

There must be at least 0.5 m (1.6 ft) of ThinWire coaxial cable between DESTA station
adapters and/or stations (see Figure 4).

•

Loops of Thin Wire coaxial cable are not allowed between repeater ports.

•

When disconnecting a station that is attached to a TEE connector, avoid disconnecting the
coaxial cable BNC connectors. Disconnect the BNC attached to the station or DESTA. Disconnecting the coaxial cable disables the entire segment.

•

It is recommended that the DEMPR have all unused ports terminated with 50-ohm terminators.
It is recommended that unused Thin Wire coaxial cable segments be tested during DEMPR
installation. The cable segments should then be disconnected from the DEMPR and a terminator installed on the DEMPR. Do not leave an unused coaxial cable attached to the DEMPR.

TERMINATOR

~~~NECTOR~
~/;
ThinWire COAX

TERMINATOR

a,cS;"

;';';'L'"

BARREL
CONNECTOR

ThinWire COAX
MKV87-1277

Figure 12 TEE Connector
~

DEMPR-19

DEMPR DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the DEMPR multiport repeater other than self-test.
Power-up self-test:
•

Occurs during power-up.

•

Tests internal logic.

•

Upon completion, all error LEDs should be OFF; self-test status should be OFF.

External self-test:
•

Occurs when SELF-TEST switch is pressed.

•

Performs external data test.

•

Unterminated ports will fail.

•

Properly terminated coaxial segments should pass.

Attaching a standard Ethernet transceiver, such as an H4000, can cause the DEMPR to execute self-test.

NOTE
Cable continuity testing is important because point
testing will not detect a shorted cable.
(

(
DEMPR-20

DEMPR DIAGNOSTICS

)

ThinWire PORTS

------f-----LOGIC
MODULE

INTERNAL
SELF-TEST
(POWERUP)

_____i___________ _

)

STANDARD ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE

EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST

ETHERNET

...- - - - - - - - - 1 TRANSCEIVER* . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -....
*LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
MAY ALSO BE USED
FOR TESTING.
. MKV86-0594

Figure 13

DEMPR Self-Test Diagram

DEMPR-21

DEMPR MAINTENANCE AIDS
DEMPR Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
When the DEMPR is suspected of malfunctioning, the entire DEMPR unit should be replaced.
Equipment Required

•
•

ThinWire 50-Ohm BNC Terminator
Data Loopback Connector

H8225
12-22196-01

Optional Equipment
•

An H4080 test connector replaces the on-line transceiver or DELNI for off-line self-testing of
the DEMPR.

•

An H4000-TA Ethernet transceiver tester modified for use with IEEE 802.3 transceivers.

Preventive Maintenance
There is no preventive maintenance performed on the DEMPR multiport repeater.

Table 4 Power LED (GREEN)
LED State

Indication

Power OK (no error).

OFF

A power supply problem is indicated. Verify that ac power is being supplied to the
unit. If power is OK, remove the transceiver cable. Power the unit up and down. If
the LED stays OFF, replace the unit. If the LED comes ON, the transceiver may
be drawing too much current. Troubleshoot and correct.

DEMPR-22

DEMPR MAINTENANCE AIDS
~,

)

Segmentation error LEOs will not light without network activity. The following table assumes that there is
some network activity going on.

Table 5

Segmentation/Error LEDs

LED State

Indication

LEDs for ThinWire Ports (1-8)*
OFF

When the port is properly terminated or a properly working coaxial cable is
attached. This indicates normal operation.

When the port is not properly terminated or not operating.

Blinking

When the port has been previously segmented.

LED for the Transceiver Cable Port

)

OFF

When the port is properly terminated, the loopback connector is installed, or a
working transceiver and transceiver cable are attached. This indicates normal
operation.

OK if the port is not connected or if the port IS properly connected to a
transceiver.

Carrier LED
ON

Network activity is present.

OFF

There is no network activity.

Self-Test Status LED
ON

When the DEMPR is being reset or executing self-test. Should never be ON for
more than 30 seconds. If ON for more than 30 seconds, replace the DEMPR.

OFF

Normal operation. This LED remains OFF when the self-test disable jumper is
installed.

*If the port has a properly installed and terminated coaxial segment, and the LED is ON, verify the
operation of the coaxial cable by moving it to a known good port. Reset the DEMPR. If the LED on the
new port is ON, verify that the cable is properly installed and terminated. If the LED on the new port is
OFF, suspect a fault in the previous DEMPR port.

DEMPR-23

DEMPR MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 6

DEMPR Operational Table
CONDITIONS

RESPONSE

After
Reset

Network
Activity

Port
Terminated

Loopback
Connector

Segment
LED

Segment
1-8 LED

Yes

Off

Yes

Off

On*

Yes

Off

Yes

On*

Yes

On*

Yes

N~Y

Blink

Yes

N~Y

Off

NOTE
The condition of the LEDs is steady state after
power-up and the reset timers have timed out. N ~
Y indicates that the condition of operation changes
dynamically in the system.
*Only when more than one port is unterminated.

DEMPR-24

DEMSA INSTALLATION

DEC MicroServer (DEMSA)
General Description
The DEC MicroServer is a data communications router providing a synchronous link between an Ethernet
and a Wide Area Network (WAN). The DEC MicroServer allows all Ethernet nodes serviced by the DEC
MicroServer to access the resources available to the WAN.

The DEC MicroServer accesses different kinds of WANs based on the software that it is running. For
example:
•
•
•

DECnet/SNA Gateway software is loaded to access an SNA Network,
X25router 2000 software is loaded to access a Packet Switched Network, and
DECrouter 2000 software is loaded to access a DECnet Network.

Figures 1 through 3 show these three examples.

ETHERNET
DECnet NETWORK
MicroServer

ACCESS ROUTINES
------'-'--~ MOD E M

IBM HOST

COMMS CONTROLLER

MKV88-1854

Figure 1

DEC MicroServer Used as a DECnet/SNA Gateway

DEMSA-I

DEMSA INSTALLATION

ETHERNET
DECnet NETWORK

MicroServer

~------~ MODEM

~-=
!

MKV88-1855

Figure 2

DEC MicroServer Used as an X.25router 2000

DEMSA-2

DEMSA INSTALLATION

ETHERNET
DECnet NETWORK

DEC router 2000

MicroServer

DECnet
NETWORK

::=:;:.'-

MKV88-1856

Figure 3

DEC MicroServer Used as a DEC router 2000

DEMSA-3

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DEC MicroServer.

•
•
•
•

Installing the DEC MicroServer
DEC MicroServer Pocket Service Guide
DEC MicroServer Maintenance Advisory
Field Maintenance Print Set

EK-DEMSA-IN
EK-DEMSA-PS
EK-DEMSA-MA
MP-01798

DEC MicroServer Hardware Components

DEC MicroServer Box:
DEMSA-AA
DEMSA-AB

120 V DEC MicroServer
240 V DEC MicroServer

Ethernet Connector Cables:
BNE3H-XX
BNE3K-XX
BNE3L-XX
BNE3M-XX
BNE4C-YY
BNE4D-YY

PVC straight connector
PVC right-angle connector
Teflon ™ straight connector
Teflon ™ right-angle connector
PVC office straight connector
PVC office right-angle connector

Where XX represents:
05
10
20
40

5 m (I6.4 ft) long
10m (32.8 ft) long
20 m (65.6 ft) long
40 m (I 3 1.2 ft) long

Where YY represents:
02
05

2 m (6.6 ft) long
5m(16.4ft)long

Adapter Cables:
BC19B-02
BCI9C-02
BC19S-02
BC19E-02
BC19F-02

DEC MicroServer to RS-422
DEC MicroServer to X.21
DEC MicroServer to V24 (includes the 12-27591-00 V24 to
RS-232-C adapter)
DEC MicroServer to RS-423
DEC MicroServer to V35

* Teflon is a trademark of E.I. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc.

DEMSA-4

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Synchronous Line Extension Cables:
BC55D-XX
BC22F-YY
BC19L-XX
BC19U·XX

RS-4 22/RS-4 23
V24
V35
X 21 leased line

Where XX represents:
25 7.6 m (25 ft)
.50 15.2 m (50 ft)
75 22.9 m (75 ft)
AO 30.5 m (100 ft)
Where YY represents:
10 3.0 m (10 ft)
25 7.6 m (25 ft)
35 10.7 m (35 ft)
50,15.2 m (50 ft)
Loopback Test Connectors:
H3199
H4080
H3248
H3198
H3198
H3250
H3047

Universal 50-way
Ethernet loop back
Synchronous line loopback (RS-232-C)
Synchronous line loopback (RS-423)
Synchronous line loopback (RS-422)
Synchronous line loopback (V35)
Synchronous line loopback (X2I)

Data-Rate to Cable-Length Relationships
Table 1 shows the approximate data-rate/cable-length characteristics of the recommended cables.
Table 1

Data-Rate/Cable-Length Relationships

Line Protocol

Data Rate (Bits/s)

Maximum Cable Length

V24/RS-232-C

Up to 20K

15 m (50 ft)

RS-423

Below 1K
20K
48K
64K
lOOK (max)

1200 m (3900 ft)
400 m (1300 ft)
160 m (500 ft)
130 m (400 [t)
85 m (270 ft)

RS-422

Below 90K
128K
256K

1200 m (3900 ft)
800 m (2600 ft)
400 m (1300 ft)

V35

48K

60 m (200 ft)

DEMSA-5

DEMSA INSTALLATION

DEC MicroServer Software Components
The DEC MicroServer software depends on the type of network link it is providing, that is, whether it is
functioning as a router or asa gateway. The instructions for loading the 'particular software are provided
with the software.
System Placement
The DEC MicroServer may be placed in any convenient location. Typical locations include:
•
•
•
•

Shelf
Table
Wall (optional H039 wall mounting bracket required)
Rack (plastic enclosure must be removed)

There must be 10 cm (4 in) of ventilation space on either side of the DEC MicroServer. To prevent dust from
entering the ventilation slots, place the unit at least 46 cm (18 in) above the floor.
Ensure that the placement of the DEC MicroServer does not block access to a fire exit or to safety
equipment. Ensure that the cables do not present a hazard to people walking.
Environmental Requirements
Environmental specifications are shown in Table 2. Make sure that the place where the DEC MicroServer is
to be installed meets these specifications.

Table 2

Environmental Specifications

Specification

Operating

Nonoperating

Maximum altitude

2438 m (8000 ft)

4877 m (16000 [t)

Temperature range*

5° to 50°C
(41 ° to 122°F)

NOTE 1

Temperature change rate

20°C/hour
(68°F/hour)

NOTE 1

Relative humidity

10% to 95%
NOTE 2

* Reduce the maximum temperature specification by 1. 8°C [or each 1000 m (1 OF for each 1000ft) above
sea level.
NOTES:

If the DEC MicroServer is nonoperational for more than 60 days, it should be in a pJace that
meets the DEC MicroServer operating specifications. If it ~s nonopenitional for less th~n60
days, it should be iIi a place that is between -40°C (-40°F) and 66°C (151°F) with a relative
humi"ity below 95%.

During the operation or storage of the DEC MicroServer, the environment must be
noncondensing.

DEMSA-6

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Preinstallation Steps
1.

Gather the following information.
a. The number of synchronous lines needed
b. The synchronous line speed to be used
c. The synchronous line cable types to be used
d. The synchronous ports to be used

Make sure that the place chosen for the installation conforms to the environmental requirements.

Check that the following are installed.

The Ethernet network

A transceiver or DELNI, and cable to connect the DEC MicroServer to the Ethernet

Synchronous communications lines

Modems

Clearly label each cable with its function.

DEMSA-7

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Installation Steps
1.

Unpack the DEC MicroServer and verify that all components are included and not damaged.

BUBBLE PACKING (CONTAINS
TURNAROUND CONNECTORS
MOUNTING BRACKETS AND SCREWS)

"INSTALLING THE DEC MicroServer
AND DEC MicroServer SYSTEMS
CONFIGURATION CARD."

DEC MicroServer

SHIPPING CARTON

MKV88-1894

Place the DEC MicroServer in the chosen location.

Verify that the power cord matches the power outlet (DO NOT plug the cord in yet).

DEMSA-8

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Select the correct voltage switch setting by referring to the following diagram.
CAUTION
An incorrect voltage switch setting may damage the
DEC MicroServer.

MKV88·1900

DEMSA-9

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Attach the Ethernet loopback connector.
G
-IX)'"

~0[]

CONNECTOR
MKV88-1951

Attach the 50-way loop back connector.

LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
MKV88-1952

DEMSA-IO

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Read and remove the yellow label covering the power connector;

Attach the power cord to the DEC MicroServer.

Insert the power cord into the power socket.
NOTE
If the DEC MicroServer is powered down, wait at
least three seconds before powering it up again.

10.

Read the display:
a.

If the decimal point is not lit and/or the cooling fans are not turning, unplug the power cable
immediately and refer to the troubleshooting flowchart (Figure 4) in the Maintenance Aids
Section of this option.

While the DEC MicroServer is running, a ripple pattern is displayed for approximately 90
seconds.

If the display shows F, E, d, or C, a test has failed. See the Troubleshooting discussion in the
Maintenance Aids Section of this option.

When the display shows a 1 or 3, the DEC MicroServer internal tests have completed successfully. The DEC MicroServer is now ready to be connected to the network.

If the display shows any other value, power down the DEC MicroServer and go to the
Troubleshooting discussion in the Maintenance Aids Section of this option.

DEMSA-II

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Connecting the DEC MicroServer to the Network

Connect the Ethernet cable to the DEC MicroServer.

DO 0

I Il~ I ~
·:"1

1.1111

"10'

TO THE LEFT

CD
PUSH LATCH FIRMLY

MKV88·1893

DEMSA-12

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Connect the Ethernet cable to one of the following, as appropriate:
• . Etherjack

MKV88·1899

•

Ethernet connection device (for example, a DELNI)

MKV88·1898

DEMSA-13

DEMSA INSTALLATION

•

Ethernet transceiver

LOCK
MKV88-1897

DEMSA-14

DEMSA INSTALLATION
3.

Connect the adapter cable to the DEC MicroServer.

MKV88·1953

DEMSA-15

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Connect the adapter cable to the extension cable and the extension cable to the modem.
•

To connect the adapter and the extension cable

EXTENSION CABLE
MKV88·1896

• To connect the extension cable to the modem

MODEM BACK PANEL

TIGHTEN SCREWS

MKV88·1895

DEMSA-16

DEMSA INSTALLATION

Complete the hardware sections of the DEC MicroServer Systems Configuration Card with the
following information.

® The serial number of the DEC MicroServer
® The DEC MicroServer hardware address
© Synchronous line and cable details
Keep the card in a convenient place (somewhere near the server) so it can be completed during the software
installation.

~DmDDmaTM DEC M icroServer Systems Configuration Card
DEC MicroServer Node Name

DEC MicroServer Software/Version

I
~ Hardware address I
Node Number
I

I
I
I

Serial Number

Location of unit

Synchronous Lines

DEC MicroServer Details

Line

Speed

Interface
Standard

Link
Protocol

0
I~

2
3

I//"-.-' "" ...,r-- ------. ______ ~. ,,--- r-----. ---- ----

..-J - - - - - - - " ' "

MKV88-1964

Installing the DEC MicroServer Software
The software media and documentation are in the software carton.
There are currently three software options available for the DEC MicroServer:
•
•
•

DECrouter 2000 V 1.0
X25router 2000 V1.0
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST V 1.0

Refer to the documentation in the software carton for instructions on installing the software option

DEMSA-17

DEMSA CABLING
Cabling
Cabling considerations were addressed in the Installation section of this option.

DEMSA-18

DEMSA DIAGNOSTICS

DEC MicroServer Diagnostics
There are diagnostics designed specifically for the DEC MicroServer that are resident in ROM. These can
be run using the remote console command "TEST". The Network Control Program (NCP) can also be used
to isolate faults. NCP is discussed in the Maintenance Aids Section of this option.

DEMSA-19

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
DEC MicroServer Maintenance Aids
This section contains information on:
•
•
•
•

DUMP switch
Troubleshooting
Using NCP
U sing the remote console

DUMP Switch
The DUMP switch is a red button on the rear of the unit that is used for:
•
•

Saving the entire context of the DEC MicroServer system
Resetting the EEPROM

Saving the Entire Context of the DEC MicroServer System - The host system puts all the dump
information on disk for future analysis. Reasons for dumping the DEC MicroServer could be:
•
•

The software signals a fatal internal error, or
A severe error occurs that causes a firmware restart.

A dump is initiated by pressing the DUMP switch or requesting a dump from the remote console.

Refer to the DEC MicroServer Maintenance Advisory for information on dumping the system.
Resetting the EEPROM - The EEPROM can be reset by holding the DUMP switch while powering the
DEC MicroServer down and then back up (disconnecting and reconnecting the power cord).

DEMSA-20

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting
Table 3 helps to identify problems in the DEC MicroServer. The table points to troubleshooting flowcharts
that can help to isolate these problems. These flowcharts suggest procedures for fixing any problems that
should occur with the DEC MicroServer.

Table 3

DEC MicroServer Troubleshooting

Symptom

Corrective Action

Decimal point on display not lit
or fan does not turn

See Figure 4

Display reads C

Failure to WRITE internal error memory. Replace DEC
MicroServer unit.

Display reads d*

Synchronous port error. Replace DEC MicroServer unit.

Display reads E

See Figure 5

Display reads F

Basic hardware error. Replace DEC MicroServer unit.

Display cycles between values 1
and 3. Software does not load

See Figure 6

Software loads but there is no
communication with the remote
system

See Figure 7

* May be reconfigured. See Reconfiguring the Customer's System discussion found at the very end of this
option.
NOTE
Units being returned should have RED fault labels
attached to them.

DEMSA-21

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Check for power
from wall socket

Check setting of
voltage switch

Check circuit
breaker

Replace power
cord. power up
and monitor
display

Replace the
DEC MicroServer

MKV88-1955

Figure 4

No Decimal Point on Display
or Fan Does Not Turn

DEMSA-22

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Attach Ethernet
loopback
connector to DEC
MicroServer

Yes

Replace the
DEC MicroServer

Yes

Replace the
Ethernet
cable

Move connector
to end of
transceiver
cable

Power up DEC
MicroServer

Possible
transceiver or
other Ethernet
problem
MKV88-1954

Figure 5

Display Reads "E"

DEMSA-23

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Check DEC
MicroServer
information in load
host database

Change the
information in
the database

Chp.ck service
enabled on host's
circuit

Enable Service on
host's circuit
Yes

Power up the
DEC MicroServer

Use NCP to
check the
Ethernet

Ethernet
hardware
fault

Possible fault
on the Ethernet
transceiver

MKV88-1963

Figure 6

Software Does Not Load

DEMSA-24

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Connect the
remote console

Attach loopback
connector to the
cable

Attach the 50-way
loopback
connector to the

Test the
cable

port

Test the

Replace the
cable

Go to the
next cable

Port

Replace the
DEC MicroServer

Test any
extension
cables

Remove loopback
connector and
reattach cable
(if any)

Test the local
modems

Replace faulty
modem(s) or
use alternatives
(if any)

Possible WAN or
remote modem
fault

If you still have a fault. refer to the DEC
MicroServer software Problem Solving
information. If the fault persists, escalate the
problem using your usual procedure.

MKV88-1956

Figure 7

Software Loads but There is No Communication with the Remote System

DEMSA-25

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Using the Network Control Program (NCP) from a Load Host
Using NCP requires access to the SYSTEM account or one with similar privileges on one of the DEC
MicroServer's load hosts. This must be coordinated with the customer. Load hosts can be either VAX/VMS
or ULTRIX systems. Each system has its own login procedure and uses a different command to start NCP.
VAX/VMS
At the system prompt, enter:
$ RUN SYS$SYSTEM:NCP
ULTRIX
At the system prompt, enter:
%ncp
All ULTRIX commands are in lowercase.
Once NCP is running, the tasks listed in Table 4 can be performed. Lowercase words in the commands are
to be replaced with the appropriate name or value:
"server name" = the node name of the DEC MicroServer
"server circuit" = the service circuit of the DEC MicroServer
other = another node on the Ethernet
For more detailed information on these tasks, refer to the DEC MicroServer Pocket Service Guide.

DEMSA-26

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 4

NCP Quick Reference

Task

Commands to Use

Check service circuit on the
load host

SHOW NODE "server name" CHAR
SHOW CIRCUIT "server circuit" CHAR

Check DEC MicroServer
information on the load host

SHOW NODE "server name" CHAR
SET NODE server

Check continuity of Ethernet
link to DEC MicroServer

LOOP NODE "server name"

Load the DEC MicroServer

TRIGGER NODE "server name"
LOAD NODE "server name"

Connect the remote console

CONNECT NODE "server name"

Get information from a
running DEC MicroServer

TELL "server name" SHOW COUNTER, KNOW
LINES, EXECUTOR CHARACTERIST, ETC

Perform data loopback on
the synchronous lines

TELL "server name LOOP CIRCUIT
CIR-ID (not X.25)
TELL "server name" LOOP LINE*
LINE-ID (X.25 only)

* Must first set line state "service" and controller loopbackj controller normal for internal or external
respectively.

DEMSA-27

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Using the Network Control Program (NCP) from a Remote Console
1.

Connect the DEC MicroServer remote console:
On VAX/VMS use the NCP command:
CONNECT NODE "server name"
SERVICE PASSWORD password
NOTE
The SERVICE PASSWORD is only needed where a
value/character has been used. The system manager
has this information.
where "server name" is the node name of DEC MicroServer, and password is the service passwon
of the DEC MicroServer.
On ULTRIX, leave NCP by typing CTRL/D and enter the ULTRIX command:
ccp -n "server name" -p password
where "server name" is the node name of the DEC MicroServer, and password is the service
password of the DEC MicroServer.

Halt the software before testing the DEC MicroServer or using any of the remote console commands

Enter remote console commands. Table 5 lists the most common remote console commands and thei
syntax. More detailed information is available in the DEC MicroServer Pocket Service Guide.

When finished with the remote console, type CTRL/D.

DEMSA-28

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 5
Command

Summary of Remote Console Commands
Name

Parameter

Qualifier

None

DUMP

None

HALT

None

software_id

None

BOOT
CLEAR

HELP

COUNTERS
PASSWORD
SOFTWARE

MORE
TEST

LOAD
SET

PASSWORD
SOFTWARE

hex-password
software_id

None

SHOW

ADDRESS
ALL
COUNTERS
ERRORS
FIRMWARE
HALT
MCHECK
PASSWORD
SOFTWARE
STATE
VERSION

None

TEST

CABLE_TYPE
DATA_LOOPBACK
MODEM-SIGNAL

None

/ALL
/CHn
/INTERNAL
/LOCAL
/MANUAL
/REMOTE

address

None

START

DEMSA-29

DEMSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Reconfiguring the Customer's System

It may be possible to use another of the DEC MicroServer ports. This depends on:
•
•
•

The number of lines used
The synchronous line speed(s) used
The synchronous port(s) used

Ports are numbered 0, 1, 2, and 3 (above the port). All four ports can support a line speed of 64 Kbits/s, but
specific ports (0 and 1) are used for higher speeds. If the port(s) that support the higher speed are faulty, the
DEC MicroServer cannot be reconfigured.
The number of lines used and the line speeds are determined by the software. Refer to the software
documentation for information on the permitted line and speed configurations to determine if the customer's
system can be reconfigured.
If the system is reconfigured, inform the customer so that any system-dependent configuration files, and the
configuration card, can be changed. Then reboot the system.

DEMSA-30

DEMWA INSTALLATION
DEMWA ETHERNET MICROWAVE ADAPTER
General Description
The DEMWA Ethernet microwave adapter is a hardware device that provides a communications link
between a LAN Bridge 100 and full-duplex microwave equipment. The DEMWA is a DELNI local network
interconnect that has been modified to work within the METROWAVE bridge configuration. The DEMWA
causes the microwave link to appear as a normal LAN.

ANTENNA

TX CONTROLLER

H4000
MKV88·1246

Figure 1

DEMWA Ethernet Microwave Adapter in a METROWAVE Bridge Unit

DEMWA Configurations
The DEMWA microwave adapter is specifically designed to be installed in the METROWAVE bridge
system and is only intended to work in that system. The DEMWA microwave adapter is the component that
physically connects the LAN Bridge 100 and the microwave equipment. It is recommended that the 2 m
transceiver cable (BNE4D-02) be used to interconnect the DEMWA and the LAN Bridge 100.

DEMWA-l

DEMWA INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DEMWA microwave adapter.
DEMWA Technical Manual

EK-DEMWA-TM

LAN Bridge 100 Installation/User's Guide

EK-DEBET-UG

LAN Bridge 100 Technical Manual

EK-DEBET-TM

DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DELNI-IN

DELNI Ethernet Local Network Interconnect Technical Manual

EK-DELNI-TM

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver Installation Card

EK-H4TAP-IN

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Technical Manual

EK-H4000-TM

M A- 2 3 LAN Transmitter/Receiver Operator's Manual (Provided by microwave vendor)
METROWAVE Bridge Terminology
For a clear understanding of how the DEMWA microwave adapter fits into the METROWAVE bridge
system, it is necessary to understand the difference between a bridge system and a bridge unit.
A METROWAVE bridge unit refers to one side of a METROWAVE bridge system and consists of the
following major components.
•
•
•

One H4000 transceiver
One LAN Bridge 100 unit
One DIGITAL Ethernet microwave adapter (DEMWA)

A METROWAVE bridge system consists of two METROWAVE bridge units and is designated DEMWB.

DEMWB Versions
There are three versions of the DEMWB bridge system.
Order Number

Installation Version

DEMWB-AA

Two METROWAVE bridge units (each preinstalled in a cabinet).

DEMWB-BA

Two METROWAVE bridge units (mountable in a satellite equipment room
(SER) rack).

DEMWA-CA

One METROWAVE bridge unit (preinstalled in a cabinet) and one METROWAVE
bridge unit (mountable in an SER rack).

Functionally the three options are the same. The different variations are for installation considerations only.

DEMWA-2

DEMWA INSTALLATION

Installing the DEMWA Microwave Adapter in the SER Rack

Remove the plastic enclosure.

Using the brackets provided in the accessories box, locate suitable mounting holes in the SER
rack allowing 5.1 cm (2 in) of clearance above and below the unit for airflow.

Fasten the mounting brackets to the DEMWA unit using the screws provided in the
accessories box.

Fasten the DEMWA unit to the SER rack with the screws provided in the accessories box.

Slide the voltage select switch on the back panel of the DEMWA unit to the 120 Vac position.

Insert the power cable into the socket on the DEMWA panel.

Plug the other end of the power cord into the SER rack power supply.
At this point the green light on the connector panel should light up.

Connect the DEMWA/LAN Bridge 100 2 m cable to the DEMWA panel port A.

Connect the other end of this cable to the LAN Bridge 100 port B.

DEMWA-3

DEMWA CABLING
Connecting the DEMWA Adapter
The DEMWA adapter should come preattached to port B of the DEMWA microwave adapter. Connect the
adapter to port B if it is not already connected.
Installing the Microwave Equipment
The installation of the MA-23LAN equipment is done by the microwave vendor. The cables for this
installation are provided by the microwave vendor.

DEMWA-4

DEMWA DIAGNOSTICS
DEMWA Installation Verification Procedure (lVP)
This section describes the specific installation verification procedure that should be followed to verify correct
installation and operation of the METROWAVE equipment. This procedure is valid even if the microwave
equipment has not been installed.
1.

Ensure that the LAN Bridge 100 switches are set as shown in Figure 2.

LOOP SELF-TEST

PORT A ACCESS

NOT USED

R~~ POR/;~ NOT USED

NVRAM

~~~fjfj
2 3 4 5 6

~ DOWN =ON

UP= OFF

CS·5763

Figure 2

LAN Bridge 100 Switch Settings

Remove the DEMWA adapter from port B of the DEMWA unit.

Power up the DEMWA unit.

Unplug the LAN Bridge 100.

DEMWA-5

DEMWA DIAGNOSTICS

Plug in the LAN Bridge 100.

(

After 15 seconds, the green light on the LAN Bridge 100 should light indicating that it passed
self-test. If the green light does not light, replace the LAN Bridge 100.
6.

Unplug the LAN Bridge 100.

Connect a loopback connector to port B of the DEMWA unit.

Plug in the LAN Bridge 100.
After 15 seconds, the green light should remain OFF. If the green light is ON, the DEMWA unit
is not operating properly.

Connect the DEMWA adapter to port B of the DEMWA unit.

10.

Unplug the LAN Bridge 100.

11.

Using a short piece of coaxial cable, connect both connectors on the DEMWA adapter together.

12.

Plug in the LAN Bridge 100.
After 15 seconds, the green light should remain OFF. If the green light is ON, the DEMWA
adapter is not operating properly.

13.

Unplug the LAN Bridge 100.

14.

Disconnect the coaxial cable from the DEMWA adapter.

15.

Plug in the LAN Bridge 100.

This verifies correct installation of the METROWAVE bridge unit.

DEMWA-6

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS
METROWAVE Bridge Troubleshooting
Proper execution of the specific steps outlined in the following flowchart should point out the component that
is failing in a nonworking METROWAVE bridge system.

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT B

REPLACE BRIDGE

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT A

MKV88-1247

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 6)

DEMWA-7

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS

PUSH S2 DOWN

NVRAM FAILURE REPLACE BRIDGE

* IN 15 SECONDS
C5-5781

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 6)

DEMWA-8

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS

PROPERLY CONNECT
BRIDGE TO LANs

YES

CONNECT LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
TOPORTSA&B

MKV88-1248

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 6)

)
DEMWA-9

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS

*FROM HOST ON PORT A TO HOST ON PORT B

MKV88-1249

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 6)

DEMWA-IO

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE BRIDGE

REMOVE LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR FROM
PORTAAND
RECONNECT CABLE

TROUBLESHOOT
DEMWAAND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT A

)

TROUBLESHOOT
DEMWAAND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT B

*AFTER 15 SECONDS
C$-5784

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 5 of 6)

DEMWA-ll

DEMWA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE BRIDGE

YES
TROUBLESHOOT
DATA LINKS TO
RESPECTIVE
NETWORK

C5-5785

Figure 3

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 6 of 6)

DEMWA-12

DEPCAINSTALLATION
DEPCA PERSONAL COMPUTER BUS ADAPTER
General Description
The DIGITAL Ethernet Personal Computer Bus Adapter (DEPCA) allows IBM PC, IBM PC/XT, and
IBM PC/AT computers to be connected to the ThinWire Ethernet Personal Computing System
Architecture (PCSA).

AUIOPTION
MOUNTING
BEZEL
BNC
CONNECTOR

LJ-1136

Figure 1 DEPCA Board and AUI Bezel

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following manuals for more information on the DEPCA adapter.

•
•
•

DEPCA Owner's Manual (includes installation guide)

EK-DEPCA-OM

Personal Workstation Handbook

EK-DEPCA-UG

DEPCA Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-02421-0 1

•

Mini Reference Guide Vol. 5 Systems

EK-MINIS-RG

•
•
•
•

IBM Hardware Maintenance and Service Manual

FS-IBM70-01

VAX/VMS Server Guide

AA-JUSIA-TE

VAXmate Server Guide

AA-JUS2A-TH

Enhanced Utilities for the IBM DOS User

AA-JUSSA-TH

•

VAXmate User's Guide

AA-HD97 A-TK

•

VAXmate Users Guide Change Pages

AA-HD91A-Tl

•

Personal Workstation Network Management Guide

AA-JUS4A-TH

)
DEPCA-l

DEPCA INSTALLATION

DEPCA Configuration
A typical standard Ethernet DEPCA configuration in an office area is made up of a DEPCA board,
VSXXX-AA corporate mouse, LK250 keyboard with an LK250/IBM cable, and the AUI and transceiver
cable option for standard Ethernet.

TRANSCEIVER
ETHERNET

STANDARD

OTHER PC's, VAXmates ON NETINORK
r -_ _ _ _ _ _ _~A~

_________

(

SERVER

r-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,

I
I
I

I
I

LK250

L - - . -----

L__ ~OUS~AND KEY~ARD OPTIO~

___

PRINTER

J
LJ-1134

Figure 2 Typical DEPCA Configurations

DEPCA-2

DEPCA INSTALLATION
Versions
The DEPCA is available in three versions (DEPCA-AA, DEPCA-BA, and DEPCA-Kx).

Table 1 DEPCA Parts List
Item

Components

1
2
3

DEPCA Board
Plastic Card Guide
Thin Wire Assembly Kit
DEPCA Owner's Manual
AUI Transceiver Cable
AUI Connector/Bracket Assembly
VSXXX Mouse
LK250 Keyboard (country-specific)
LK250/IBM Keyboard Cable
LK250 Keyboard Cable Installation Card

5
6
7

8
9

Version
AA

Version
BA

Version

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X

CAUTION-STATIC ELECTRICITY CAN
DAMAGE THE DEPCA

AUI CONNECTOR/
BRACKET ASSEMB LY
AUI TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

VSXXX
MOUSE

LK250/IBM KEYBOARD
CABLE

PERSONAL
WORKSTATION
HANDBOOK

ThinWire
ASSEMBLY KIT
DEPCA OWNER'S
MANUAL

LK250 CABLE
INSTALLATION GUIDE

1.1.-1090

)

Figure 3 DEPCA Components
DEPCA-3

DEPCAINSTALLATION
J,!mper Settings
FIgure 4 shows the location and default setting of the DEPCA Jumpers.
.

W9 through W14

W16

W15

CONNECTOR FOR AUI (J4)

W17

Wl through W5

W8
LL-l09~

Figure 4

DEPCA Def ault Jumper Settings

DEPCA-4

DEPCA INSTALLATION

The DEPCA uses 2-pin and 3-pin jumper arrangements. The 2-pin arrangement allows two selections by
either installing or removing the jumper.
The 3-pin arrangement allows three selections:
•

No connection - Jumper removed.

•

Top connection (position) - Jumper installed on the top and center pins. The top pin in a row of
three is the pin farthest away from the gold-plated edge connector (J2).

•

Bottom connection (position) - Jumper installed on the center and bottom pins. The bottom pin in
a row of three is the pin closest to the gold-plated edge connector (12).
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage the circuitry of the
DEPCA board. Always use a grounded wrist strap
and work surface.

)

PARKED

INSTALLED

TOP CONNECTION

BOTTOM CONNECTION

PARKED

REMOVED

NO CONNECTION
LJ-1139

Figure 5

DEPCA 2-Pin and 3-Pin Jumper Installation

DEPCA-5

DEPCAINSTALLATION

Interrupt Request Jumpers
The DEPCA uses two interrupt request lines (IRQ) - one for the mouse and controller, and the other for the
DEPCA network interface (NI).

Table 2

DEPCA Interrupt Request Line/Jumpers Select

DEPCA
Jumper

IBM
Request Line

DEPCA Mouse IRQ
(Top Position)

WI
W2
W3
W4
W5

IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6

Default setting

DEPCA NI IRQ
(Bottom Position)

Default setting

DEPCA-6

DEPCAINSTALLATION
Table 3

Other DEPCA Jumper Settings

I/O Address Selection
W6

300 - 30F (default setting)
200 - 20F

Memory Address
W7

Primary at DOOOO - DFFFF (default setting)
Secondary at EOOOO - EFFFF

Enable/Disable DLL ROM Decode
W8

Installed (default setting)
Not installed

ThinWire/AUI Ethernet Interface
W9
WIO

CDCD+

Wll

RX+
RX-

WI2
W13
WI4

)

TX+
TX-

Bottom position = ThinWire networks.
Top position = AUI networks).
IEEE 802.3/Transceiver II Cable Grounding
WI5

IEEE 802.3 (removed)
Transceiver II (installed, default setting)

Remote Boot Selection
W16

Enabled (installed, default setting)
Disabled (removed)

DC Power Conversion
WI7

Enable (installed, default setting)
Disable (removed)

DEPCA-7

DEPCA INSTALLATION
DEPCA System Requirements
To support the DEPCA, the IBM system must have the following components:
•

130 W (or greater) power supply

•

System BIOS ROM revision 10-27-82 (or later)

•

Minimum of 128 Kbytes of system memory to run diagnostic test for the DEPCA
NOTE
More memory may be required to run PCSA or
DEC net-DOS network software.

Power Requirements
The IBM PCI AT is shipped with a 170 W or 250 W power supply.
The IBM PC/XT is shipped with a 130 W power supply. The wattage is usually printed on top cf the power
supply.
The IBM PC is shipped with a 63.5 W or 89 W power supply. The wattage is usually printed on top of the
power supply. Replace these power supplies with a 130 W power supply (minimum).
NOTE
If the IBM PC has a hard disk or a hard card, the
power supply probably has been replaced with a 130
W power supply.
Identifying System BIO~ ROM Revision Date
Revisions of the system BIOS ROM dated 10-27-82 or later can handle up to 640 Kbytes of system
memory. The IBM PC is shipped with the following ROM revision dates.
•

The IBM PCI AT and IBM PC/XT are shipped with a ROM revision date of 10-27-82 or later.
These ROMs are acceptable.

•

Early versions of the IBM PC were shipped with a ROM revision date earlier than 10-27-82.
These ROMs are not acceptable and must be replaced with a ROM with a revision date of
10-27-82 or later.
NOTE
If the IBM PC has a hard disk or a hard card, the
ROM probably has been upgraded to 10-27-82 or
later.

ROM Revision Date
There are two ways to get the ROM revision date.
•
•

Run PC-DOS DEBUG program.
Run a BASIC program.

DEPCA-8

DEPCA INSTALLATION
Running the PC-DOS DEBUG Program - Use the following procedure to run the DEBUG program.
1.

Start DOS. Check that DEBUG is included in the directory.

At the prompt, type: DEBUG <RETURN>

At the cursor, type: D FFFF:5 <RETURN>
The system displays a series of hexadecimal numbers with the ROM revision date in the upper
right of the display.

At the cursor, type: Q <RETURN>
The system exits the DEBUG program and returns to the A> prompt.

ROM REVISION DATE

31 31 2F-30 38 2F 38 32 FF FF 28
01 70 ~O-SF F8 00 FO 47 01 70 00
FF 00 FO-23 FF 00 FO 23 FF 00 FO

11/27/83 •• (
rO •• G• P • • •• G• P •

G.p.T ••• # ••• # •••
LJ-1135

Figure 6 ROM Revision Using the DEBUG Program

Running the BASIC ROM Revision Date Program - Check the ROM revision date by entering the
following BASIC program.

Invoke BASIC and then type:
10 DEF SEG = &HFOOO <RETURN>
20 FOR X = &HFFF5 to &HFFFC <RETURN>
30 PRINT CHR$ (PEEK(X)); <RETURN>
40 NEXT <RETURN>

To run the program, type: RUN <RETURN>
The system displays the ROM revision date followed by OK. For example:

11/27/83
OK
3.

Exit from BASIC

)
DEPCA-9

DEPCA INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

• REMOVE DISKETIES
• SET POWER
SWITCH OFF
• UNPLUG POWER
CORD
• REMOVE SYSTEM
UNIT COVER
CONFIGURE THE
DEPCA MODULE FOR
CUSTOMER
REQUIREMENTS

ATIACH MOUSE
CABLE ONTO THE
DEPCA MOUSE
CONNECTOR

MKV87·1329

Figure 7 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

DEPCA-IO

DEPCA INSTALLATION

)

GO TO MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

SELF-TEST HAS
COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY

MKV87-1330

Figure 7 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

DEPCA-ll

DEPCA CABLING

Cabling
This section contains the cabling diagram for the DEPCA adapter.

MKV87-1331

Figure 8 DEPCA Cabling

DEPCA-12

DEPCA DIAGNOSTICS
DEPCA Diagnostics
The DEPCA diagnostics consist of the following tests.
•

Self-test that runs each time the IBM PC, IBM PC/XT, or IBM PCI AT is turned ON or
RESET.

•

Diskette-based service diagnostics for the service engineer that further test the DEPCA.

The self-test and service diagnostic tests display error numbers on the screen when a fault is encountered.
The DEPCA diagnostic LED also comes ON when a fault is encountered during testing.
DEPCA Self-Test
When the self-test detects a fault, the screen displays "DEPCA" and an error number followed by a message
on how to continue. For example:
DEPCA 72
Press Fl to continue
The red DEPCA FRU failure indicator LED also comes ON. The LED will also come ON when a mouse
fault is detected, however, a mouse fault is not considered a fatal error.

Table 4 Self-Test Error Codes
Test
No.

Fault
Condition

Memory access

Check jumpers for conflict with other installed
options (W7).

Data path

Check jumpers for conflict with other installed
options (W6 and W7). Check jumper W8 (ON).

Address test

Check jumpers for conflict with other installed
options (W6).

RAM test

Check primaryI secondary setting W 6 and W7.

Ethernet ROM checksum

Check network interface jumpers (W9 - WI4).
Check that Ethernet address ROM is properly seated
in socket. Run LANCE service diagnostics. Replace
Ethernet ROM. Replace DEPCA - LANCE chip is
bad.

NI - CSR error

Run LANCE service diagnostics.

LANCE internal register

Check primaryIsecondary setting W6.

LANCE initialization

Replace DEPCA - LANCE chip is bad.

LANCE interrupt

Check NI IRQ jumper setting (WI - W5).

Corrective Action

DEPCA-13

DEPCA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 4 Self-Test Error Codes (Cont)
Test
No.

Fault
Condition

Corrective Action

NI - CSR mask test

Run LANCE service diagnostics.

LANCE internalloopback

Run LANCE service diagnostics.

LANCE collision

Run LANCE service diagnostics.

LANCE CRC generation

Run LANCE service diagnostics.

Mouse internal register

Check mouse IRQ jumper setting.

Mouse interrupt

Check mouse IRQ jumper setting.

Mouse loopback

Run mouse service diagnostics.

Mouse baud rate error

Run mouse service diagnostics.

ANY

System is hung, yellow
LED ON, no keyboard
response

Power OFF and disconnect DEPCA from the
network. Power ON. IF the yellow LED remains ON
for more than 30 seconds, replace DEPCA.

Preparing to Run the Service Diagnostics
Perform the following steps before running the service diagnostics.
1.

Place the keypad in numeric mode. (The easiest way to do this is to turn the system OFF. When
the system is turned ON again, the keypad starts in the default nonnumeric mode.)

Connect a mouse loopback connector or a mouse to the DEPCA. Use the following procedure to
attach the mouse.
a.

Set the power OFF and remove all cables.

Remove the cover and loosen the restraining screw that secures the DEPCA.

Firmly plug in the mouse or mouse loopback connector.

Tighten the DEPCA restraining screw and replace the cover.

Connect all cables.

DEPCA-14

DEPCA DIAGNOSTICS
3.

Disconnect the computer from the active network by removing the ThinWire TEE connector or
transceiver cable if an AUI option is installed. Then perform one of the following.
a.

Connect a ThinWire or AUI loopback connector (if the AUI option is installed) to the
DEPCA.

Connect a two-station Thin Wire or AUI diagnostic cable to this DEPCA and to a remote
echo station with an installed DEPCA. This configuration is used to test the ability of the
DEPCA to send, receive, and echo packets.
NOTE
The diagnostic program calls the ThinWire and AUI
loopback connectors a "LANCE loopback".

Starting the Diagnostic Program
Use the following procedure to start the diagnostic program.

Prepare the system and DEPCA for testing as described in the "Preparing to Run the Service
Diagnostics" section.

Insert the diagnostic diskette in drive A or B and set the system and monitor power switch to 1
(ON).

Press any key to start the diagnostics.
The diagnostic program loads its default settings and automatically determines the following
DEPCA configurations.
a.

The DEPCA memory and I/O starting address settings. The diagnostic program displays
the memory address as "memory segment."

The DEPCA interrupt request (IRQ) settings for the mouse and network interface. The
diagnostic program displays the network IRQ as "LANCE IRQ."

The DEPCA Ethernet ROM address. (This address is different for each DEPCA.)

DEPCA-15

DEPCA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 5

Service Diagnostic Error Codes

No.

Fault

Corrective Action

~ennory data error
CSR register diagnostic LED failed
CSR register ENB INT failed
CSR register MADT INT failed
CSR register ROM reset failed
Address ROM CRC failed

DLL ROM CRC failed

LANCE interrupt failed

9
10

LANCE initialization failed
LANCE babble detected

Check junnper setting W7.
Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Check junnper setting (W9 - W 14 and
WI7). Check that Ethernet address
ROM is seated correctly. Replace
DEPCA (LANCE bad).
Check junnper setting W8. Replace
DEPCA.
Check jumper setting WI - W5.
Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Run packet passer test. Replace
DEPCA.

11
12

LANCE collision
LANCE nnissed packet

13
14

~ERR detected

Franning error

Overflow error

CRC error

Buffer error

Transnnit error

DEF XMIT

~ultiple retries

Late collision

lost carrier

24
25

Underflow
Retry error
Bad nnennory detected

2
3

4
5

26
27

28
29

Install network loopback connector or
connect to packet passer station and
repeat test. Check junnper WI 7.
Replace DEPCA (LANCE bad).
Replace DEPCA.
Run packet passer test. Check junnper
W17. Replace DEPCA.
Run packet passer test. Check junnper
WI7. Replace DEPCA.
Restart systenn and test again. Replace
DEPCA.
Check all jumper settings. Replace
DEPCA.
Check junnper setting W6. Replace
DEPCA.
Check all jumper settings. Replace
DEPCA.
Check all jumper settings. Replace
DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Run packet passer test. Replace
DEPCA (LANCE bad).
Run packet passer test. Replace
DEPCA (LANCE bad).
Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.
Press RETURN to continue testing.
Replace DEPCA (RO~ bad).
Replace DEPCA (LANCE bad).
Check WI - W5. Replace DEPCA.
Replace DEPCA.

Receive error detected

BAD I/O detected
Bad IRQ setup
LANCE CRC error

DEPCA-16

DEPCA DIAGNOSTICS

)

Table 5

Service Diagnostic Error Codes (Coot)

No.

Fault

Corrective Action

30
31

Mouse baud rate test failed
Lost received frame

Mouse failed to transmit

Mouse did not receive expected data

Mouse bad data received

Mouse did not interrupt

Mouse register test failed

Replace DEPCA.
Check jumper WI 7. Run packet passer test. Replace DEPCA (LANCE
bad).
Install mouse loop back or connect
mouse and retest. Check mouse IRQ
jumper setting W 1 - WS. Mouse
controller bad. Replace DEPCA if customer uses mouse.
Install mouse loop back or connect
mouse and retest. Check mouse IRQ
jumper setting WI - WS. Mouse
controller bad. Replace DEPCA if customer uses mouse.
Mouse may be bad. Install mouse loopback and retest. Mouse controller bad.
Replace DEPCA if customer uses
mouse.
Check IRQ jumper setting. Mouse
controller bad. Replace DEPCA if customer uses mouse.
Replace DEPCA.

)
DEPCA-17

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting Sequence
The troubleshooting sequence generally consists of the following steps.
1.

Visually check the system for loose cables and connections.

Run the DEPCA self-test and service diagnostics to isolate FRUs.

Check all jumper settings.

Check for problems reported by the customer that are not associated with a fault number
reported by the self-test.

Replace any FRUs identified by the self-test and service diagnostics.

Check the DEPCA ThinWire network cable connection for opens, shorts, and terminations.

Check the packet-passing ability of the DEPCA by setting up a remote echo station and running
the service diagnostic LANCE tests.

Troubleshooting Procedures
The following describes the procedures to isolate problems connected with the DEPCA. All procedures
assume that the IBM computer is operating properly.
No Response at Power-up - No response from the DEPCA at power-up means that the screen fails to
display any system start-up messages or the system fails to respond to the keyboard. If this occurs, perform
the following steps.
1.

Check that the monitor is turned ON.

Check the DEPCA LEDs to see if they are ON. If either LED is ON, refer to Table 6.

Turn the computer OFF and make sure that the DEPCA jumpers are correctly set and the board
is firmly seated in the computer.

Check that all cables are firmly connected.

Turn computer and monitor ON.

If the problem persists and other options are present, note the location of the other options, remove all options

except the disk controller and video options, and try again.
CAUTION
Some third-party options may require installation in
specific locations in the computer. Therefore, whenever an option is removed, make sure it is installed in
the same location.

DEPCA-18

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 6

DEPCA LEDs

LED

Activity

Indication

RED only

ON and OFF (for 20
to 30 seconds)

Normal during self-test.

A fault has occurred. Check jumper settings and
run the service diagnostics.

YELLOW
only

Slowly or rapidly
flickering

Normal during network activity self-test or service
diagnostic tests.

YELLOW
and RED

YELLOW rapidly
or steadily ON;
RED ON

Fault has occurred. Check jumper settings and
run the service diagnostics.

(See NOTES)

YELLOW steadily ON
for longer than 30
seconds; RED ON.
Keyboard does not
respond.

DEPCA preventing CPU from operating correctly. Power down, then up again. If problem persists,
replace the DEPCA.

NOTES:
It may be difficult to determine the difference between a rapidly flickering and steadily ON YELLOW
LED. The difference can be determined by physically disconnecting the network cable from the DEPCA
and restarting the computer.
If the YELLOW LED remains ON for longer than 30 seconds and the keyboard does not respond, the
DEPCA is preventing the CPU from operating correctly.

Try restarting the computer again. If the problem persists, replace the DEPCA.

DEPCA-19

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7 Fault Isolation by Symptom
Symptom

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

Network starts
but cannot use
mouse.

Mouse cable loose or
mouse IRQ set
incorrectly.

Check cable connection and IRQ setting
(Wi - W5).

Possible faulty
mouse, mouse cable, or
mouse fuse on DEPCA.

Run mouse diagnostics with mouse loopback connected. If mouse fuse is blown and
internal and external loopback tests pass,
replace mouse. If external loopback test
fails, test the DEPCA fuses with an ohmmeter to make sure the fuses read out at
zero. Replace mouse and DEPCA.

System ON but
nothing happens.

I/O or memory address
set incorrectly.

Check primary/secondary settings for W6
and W7.

System ON but
nothing happens.
Both LEDs ON.
Keyboard does not
respond.

DEPCA is preventing
the CPU from operating
correctly.

Turn computer OFF, then ON again. If
condition persists, turn the power OFF and
disconnect the DEPCA' from the network.
Turn the power ON. If the YELLOW
LED is ON for longer than 30 seconds,
replace the DEPCA.

System ON but no
display.

Monitor is not ON.

Turn monitor power switch ON.

System does not
boot.

W16 was removed.

Install Wi6.

System ON but
network does not
start or other
options do not
start.

Network cables or AUI
ribbon cable loose.

Check all network cables.

Network and/or IRQ
jumpers set incorrectly.

Check W9 - WI4 and
WI - W 5 settings.

Thin Wire Network present; W 17 was removed.

Install W17.

I/O or memory jumpers
set incorrectly.

Check W 6 and W7 settings.

Conflicting network or
other option.

Adjust settings on conflicting options.
Obtain permission and remove remaining
conflicting options.

DEPCA-20

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS
)

Table 7

Fault Isolation by Symptom (Cont)

Symptom

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

AUI option present
and DEPCA AUI fuses
blown.

Connect AUI loopback connector and run
service diagnostics. If loopback GREEN
power LED is OFF, fuse is blown. Test fuse
with ohmmeter. Replace DEPCA and AUI
cable. If problem persists, there is a problem with external connections of the transceiver cable or external devices.

System ON but
screen displays
an error message
when attempting
to start the
network.

Network and/or IRQ
jumpers set incorrectly.
Intermittent or fatal
fault with DLL ROM on
the DEPCA.

Run DEPCA self-test again to determine
if a fault occurs. Check all jumper
settings.

Running a BASIC
program but
cannot use the
network.

Versions of BASIC prior
to Version 2.0 in use
and NI IRQ is set at
IRQ3 (W2).

Early versions of BASIC mask IRQ3 and
IRQ4. Have customer replace BASIC with
Version 2.0 or later. The NI IRQ can also
be set to IRQ2 (W1); move the default
mouse IRQ2 (WI) to IRQ5 (W4) or
IRQ7 (W5).

)

Troubleshooting Flowchart - The following DEPCA troubleshooting flowchart is used in conjunction with
the power-up self-test and the DEPCA service diagnostics diskette.

DEPCA-21

t'rl

a
3:
>

Z
~
t'rl

Z
>
Z
~

t'rl

CHECK
JUMPER
SETTINGS
ANT CABLES

g
f5
;;>

RUN SERVICE
DIAGNOSTIC
AUTOMATIC
TEST

N
N

RUN INDIVIDUAL
TESTS. CHECK
JUMPER
'-------tl SETTI NGS
AND/OR
REPLACE FRU

REPLACE
DEPCA
(I ntermittent LANCE or
DLL ROM Problem)
MKV87·1345

Figure 9 DEPCA Troubleshooting Flowchart

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS

)

Checking the DEPCA ThinWire LAN Cable Connection - The service diagnostic Local Area Network
Controller Ethernet (LANCE) tests include an automatic externalloopback test that can be used to test the
DEPCA cable connection.
1.

Test the DEPCA Ethernet logic circuitry.
a.

Plug in the ThinWire network loopback connector. Make sure two 50-ohm terminators are
connected to the TEE connector.

Start the service diagnostics and run the LANCE tests.

Test the ThinWire cable section for opens and for correct termination.
a.

Configure the DEPCA using the ThinWire LAN cable assembly kit.

Run the service diagnostic LANCE tests.

Test the ThinWire cable and the TEE connectors for shorts. Have the ohmmeter set to the
times 1 scale.
a.

Assemble the cable and connectors.

Connect the ohmmeter. The meter should read:

1
)I

25 ohms if there is a terminator at each end.

50 ohms if there is a terminator at only one end.

If a correct value is not read, run the test again with a different cable. Replace the cable,
TEE connectors, or terminator, depending on the results of the ohmmeter test.

1
!

DEPCA-23

DEPCA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Spares
The following table lists the DEPCA FRUs and spares.

Table 8

Field Replaceable Units and Spares

Component

DIGITAL PjN

DEPCA
A UI connector
AUI transceiver II cable 4.6 m (15 ft)
LAN cable assembly 3.8 m (12 [t)*
ThinWire cable, PVC 1.9 m (6 ft)**
ThinWire cable, PVC 4.4 m (15 ft)**
ThinWire cable, PVC 9.4 m (30 ft)**
TEE connector
Terminator (50 ohm)
Thin Wire loop back connector

70-24252-01
17-01491-01
BCC06-15 or 17-00612-05
PC50X-CB or BC16T-12
BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30
H8223
H8225
H8225 (Qty 2)
H8223 (Qty 1)
12-25628-01
12-22196-01
VSXXX-AA
17-01517-02
12-18783-00

Mouse loopback connector
AUI loopback connector
Corporate mouse
LK250jIBM cable
Jumper

* Includes an installed TEE connector, terminator, and BNC connector.
** Includes two installed BNC connectors.

Required Tools
The following tools are required to service the DEPCA.

Table 9

DEPCA Tools

Tool

Part Number

Standard Field Service Tool Kit (U.S.A.)
Standard Field Service Tool Kit (Europe)
ESD grounding kit
Mouse loop back connector
Thin Wire loopback connector

29-23270-00
29-23268-00
29-11762-00
12-25628-01
H8225 (Qty 2)
H8223 (Qty 1)
12-22196-01

AUI option loopback connector (needed if option is present)

DEPCA-24

DEQNAINSTALLATION
DEQNA Q-BUS DATA COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER

General Description
The DEQNA Q-Bus (LSI-II bus) data communications controller interfaces the Digital Equipment
Corporation LSI-II processor family to the Ethernet local area network.
The DEQNA controller consists of one dual LSI-II module (M7504) that plugs into the Q-Bus backplane
and resides in the same enclosure. It is physically and electrically connected to the H4000 transceiver as
shown in Figure 1.
FACTORY INSTALLED SYSTEM-OPTION NUMBER
DEQNA-KP (INCLUDES THE CABINET KIT)
ETHERNET
COAXIAL
CABLE

ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER

1'T-1r-Y----_. CABLE

BULKHEAD I/O
PANEL ASSEMBLY

MKV85-1146

Figure 1 DEQNA to Ethernet Connection

DEQNA-l

DEQNAINSTALLATION
Features

•

Transmits and receives data at a rate of 10M bits/so

•

Recognizes heartbeat and collIsion detection.

•

Performs packet serialization, formatting, Manchester encoding, and multiple retransmission.

•

Generates and checks 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (eRC).

•

Interfaces with the H4000 Ethernet transceiver.

•

Performs Direct Memory Access (DMA) transfers to and from CPU memory.

•

Contains quick-verify diagnostics for power-up and boot.

•

Performs internal and externalloopback, and can assist on loopback of data from other stations.

•

SupJ?Orts host system identification response.

•

Supports host down-line load and remote boot by other nodes on the network.

Reference Documentation

•
•

Introduction to Local Area Networks

EB-22714-18

The Ethernet, A Local Area Network, Data
Link Layer, and Physical Layer Specification

AA-K759B-TK

•
•
•

DEQNA Ethernet User's Guide

EK-DEQNA-UG-OOI

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Technical Manual

EK-H4000-TM-OO I

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Field
Maintenance Print Set

MP-01369

•

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with
Removable Tap Assembly Installation Card

EK-H4TAP-IN

•
•

DEQNA (M7504) Maint.enance Print Set

MP-01885

DEQNA Cabinet Kits Maintenance Print Set

MP-01811

DEQNA-2

DBQNAINSTALLATION
Hardware Components
•
•

DEQNA module (M7504)
Bulkhead cable assembly, one required (refer to Table I)

Table 1 Bulkhead Cable Assemblies
Length
CM

Cable Type

Use

Designation

53.3

Shielded cable/bulkhead

(PDP-I 1/23)

CK-DEQNA-KA

30.5

Shielded cable/bulkhead

(MICRO PDP-II)

CK-DEQNA-KB

76.2

Shielded cable/bulkhead

(PDP-II/23-PLUS)

CK-DEQNA-KC

Cable Type

Use

Designation

3.048

Shielded cable

General use*

CK-DEQNA-KD

*Non-FCC compliant installations

)

Software Components
The following software components are included with the DEQNA configuration.
•

Citizenship diagnostic

•

Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP) code (resident in ROM on M7504 module)

Bus Latency Constraints
The DEQNA controller should be the highest priority device on the Q-Bus, that is, the DMA device
nearest to the CPU. When two DEQNA controllers are installed, a block-mode memory is required if high
Ethernet traffic rates are to be handled. The following is a recommended module installation.
Processor
Memory
DEQNA I
DEQNA 2/0ther
Others

Slot I
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slots 5-8

)
DEQNA-3

DEQNA INSTALlATION

Loading Requirements
The Q-Bus loads for the M7504 module are outlined in Table 2.
Table 2

DEQNA Q-Bus Loading

Module

Q-Bus DC Loads

Q-Bus AC Loads

M7504

0.5

2.2

Power Requirements
Power supply voltages (Table 3) should be checked before and after installation to verify the absence of
overloading and overvoltage conditions.
Table 3

DEQNA Power Requirements

Voltage Rating
(Typical Values)

Typical
Current

Maximum
Current

Backplane
Pins

+5 ±0.25 V

3.5 A

5.0 A

AA2, BA2, BV I

+ 12 ±0.60 V
(for transceivers)

0.5 A

B02

Logic Reference

All, AMI, ATI
AC2, B1I, BMI
BC2

Transceiver Return

BTl

*At power-up, transceiver surge current at the power connection is high enough to current-limit and
power-fail some power supplies. The OEQNA controller does not contain power supply surge protection;
it must be provided elsewhere if required by the system configuration.

OEQNA-4

DEQNAINSTALLATION
Jumpers
The DEQNA module (Figure 2) is configured with three jumpers (W 1, W2, and W3) that are installed
during manufacture. See Table 4 for a description of these jumpers.

?OOOOOOOOO

~ooooooooo

[~
STATION
ADDRESS
PROM

c::::::]

C=I
W2

MR-12440

)

Figure 2

DEQNA Module (M7504)

DEQNA-5

DEQNAINSTALLATION
Table 4

DEQNA Jumper Functions

Jumper

Function

WI
W2
W3

I/O Page Address
BDMR Holdoff Timer
Sanity Timer at Initialization

17774440

17774460*

No Delay
Disabled

5 f,LS Delay

Out

Enabled

*Second DEQNA controller

Installation Flow Diagram

• HOST BOOT/
DIAGNOSTIC
ROMs
• BACKPLANE
REQUIREMENTS
• BUS LATENCY
CONSTRAINTS
• LOADING
REQUIREMENTS

BACKPLANE

M7504 MODULE

PATCH AND FILTER
PANEL ASSEMBLY
(REFER TO FIGURE 4).

CHECK DISPOSITION OF
JUMPERS Wl. W2. AND
W3 (REFER TO TABLE 4).

REMOVE AND SAVE
TWO SCREWS SECURING OPTION PANEL

MKV85·1147

Figure 3

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet I of 4)

DEQNA-6

DEQNAINSTALLATION

TURN SYSTEM OFF.
UNPLUG AC POWER
CORD FROM WALL
SOCKET.

REMOVE REAR PLASTIC
COVER FROM SYSTEM
UNIT (IF PRESENT).

OPEN PATCH AND
FILTER PANEL
ASSEMBLY.

IF NECESSARY,
RECONFIGURE THE
SYSTEM TO ACCEPT
DEQNA IN APPROPRIATE
BACKPLANE SLOT.

MKV85-1148

Figure 3

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

)
DEQNA-7

DEQNA INSTALLATION

IF NECESSARY,
REMOVE AND RELOCATE
G7272 GRANT
CONTINUITY CARDS.

PLUG AC POWER CORD
INTO WALL SOCKET.
TURN SYSTEM POWER
ON.

MEASURE BACKPLANE
VOLTAGES (REFER TO
TABLE 3).

TURN SYSTEM OFF.
UNPLUG AC POWER
CORD FROM WALL
SOCKET.

MKV85-1149

Figure 3

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DEQNA-8

DEQNAINSTALLATION

SLIDE M7504 MODULE
INTO CARD GUIDES
(COMPONENT SIDE
NEAREST THE
PROCESSOR MODULE).
DO NOT INSERT
MODULE ALL THE WAY
INTO SLOT.

INSERT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE ASSEMBLY INTO
THE SYSTEM I/O PANEL.

SECURE TRANSCEIVER
CABLE ASSEMBLY WITH
TWO SCREWS SAVED
DURING PANEL
REMOVAL.

CONNECT KEYED CABLE
OF THE BULKHEAD
ASSEMBLY TO THE
MODULE.

SLIDE M7504 MODULE
ALL THE WAY INTO
CARD SLOT.

MKV85·1150

Figure 3

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DEQNA-9

DEQNAINSTALLATION
Post-Installation Power Checks
1.

Plug the ac power cord into the wall socket and turn the system power ON.

Measure the backplane voltages at the slot containing the M7504 module. The voltages should
be within the tolerances listed in Table 3.

Turn the system power OFF.

Light Emitting Diode (LED) Checks (Refer to Table 5)
I.

Connect either an Ethernet transceiver with cable or a loopback connector to the transceiver
cable connector on the patch and filter panel assembly (refer to Figure 4).

Turn the system power ON.
All three LEOs on the M7504 module should be on within one second.

Boot the system from the OEQNA controller.
The LEDs should turn OFF, one at a time, until none of the LEOs are ON.
NOTE
The new CPU PROMs (with code for booting from
the DEQNA controller) must be installed.
Table 5

DEQNA LED Indications

LED
1

Indication

OFF

OEQNA controller passed all Citizenship tests (CQ).

OFF

Transceiver, Ethernet, or cable error.

OFF

DEQNA internal error.

•
•
•

Cannot upload BO ROM contents
The bootstrap has not yet executed
The first set-up packet prefill has failed

OEQNA-IO

DEQNAINSTALLATION
UNUSED
OPTION PANELS

50-PIN CONNECTOR
EXPANSION SLOTS
OR DEONA PANEL
MR-12453

Figure 4

Typical Patch and Filter Panel Assembly

Diagnostic Acceptance Procedure
1.

Run the Field Functional Test (refer to the DEQNA Diagnostics section).

Turn the system power OFF.

Close and fasten the patch and filter panel assembly.

IF a loopback test transceiver was used, disconnect it.

Replace the rear plastic cover on the system unit (this does not apply to rack mounted panels).

IF not already connected, connect the system to an installed Ethernet transceiver.

Installation is now complete.

DEQNA-li

DEQNA CABLING

Cabling
Figure I illustrates how the DEQNA controller is connected to the H4000 transceiver. Refer to Table 1
for a listing of the bulkhead cable assemblies that are available.

DEQNA-12

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

DEQNA Diagnostics
The DEQNA diagnostics include:
•
•
•

Software to boot the DEQNA controller,
Tests to ensure that the module is working correctly, and
Tests to isolate faults.

Extended Primary Bootstrap (EPB)
The DEQNA controller is loaded, or booted, in a way that is similar to booting a mass storage device. Host
primary boot code passes control to the Extended Primary Bootstrap (EPB) code (loaded from the BD
ROM), which continues the bootstrap process by loading the contents of the BD ROM into the host
memory. When the load is complete, the DEQNA Citizenship test is run before the DEQNA controller is
allowed to access the Ethernet network.
If the Citizenship test is passed, the bootstrap process continues and control is transferred to either:
•
•

The DEC net bootstrap (part of the Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP) code loaded from
the BD ROM).
An address in the host memory.

If the DEQNA controller fails the Citizenship test, the EPB code attempts to halt the CPU, without
attempting to boot DECnet or transferring control to a user's program. The LEDs on the DEQNA
controller help to indicate the nature of the failure.

Boot sequence:
1.

Load the first 512 bytes of BD ROM (EPB code).

Verify descriptor status and the CSR.

In the host, set up registers RO and R 1, and location 12 (octal) of main memory (see next
step). Continue.

IF a failure is detected, examine location 12 (octal) of main memory.
IF location 12 is zero, halt the EPB.
IF location 12 is nonzero, transfer control to the address contained in location 12.

Load the remaining bytes of the BD ROM into host memory.

Verify the BD ROM data transfer using the ROM checksum.

The host executes the Citizenship test.

IF the Citizenship test fails, return control to the EPB and halt.

IF the Citizenship test passes, transfer control (as determined by the value in the host register
RO) to either:
a.

The MOP code to boot DEC net. This code continuously attempts to boot DECnet until
successful or until stopped by the host.

A user defined code.
DEQNA-13

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Citizenship Test (CQ)
The DEQNA Citizenship test (CQ) is a series of diagnostic test routines that determine if the DEQNA
controller is operating correctly and can access the Ethernet network, or is faulty and requires further
diagnosis. Test results are indicated by the LEDs on the DEQNA module and are returned to the host's
register RO, where they are accessible to software. The CQ test uses internal loopback, internal extended
loopback, and externalloopback modes, and requires the DEQNA controller and an H4000 transceiver (or
equivalent). Connecting the DEQNA controller to the Ethernet network is not required if a loopback
connector (H4000 transceiver along with a terminated cable or other connector) is used. Prior to executing
the tests, CQ turns OFF the sanity timer. Upon completion of the tests, it turns the sanity timer ON if
jumper W3 is removed (timer enabled), or leaves the timer OFF if jumper W3 is in place (timer disabled).
The CQ test is a free-standing subroutine and can be called by other software. For example, during
network boot, CQ can determine if the node should be allowed to proceed from the initialized state to
either a functional state or a nonfunctional state. If a fault exists, MOP code can call CQ to determine if
other DEQNA diagnostics or network-level diagnostics are required for fault isolation. Table 6 lists the
various tests and indicates the corresponding bit numbers in the host register RO along with a description
of the error.

Table 6

CQ Tests and Error Indications

No. Test

RO Bits

Indications

Station address is all zero bits.

Station address is all one bits.

Station address is not a valid DEQNA address.

Bus time-out or nonexistent memory error.

No interrupt occurred.

Interrupt occurred prematurely.

Wrong interrupt occurred.

12,01

Target address echoed data check.

12,09,01

Set-up packet operation time-out.

14,12,01

Set-up packet operation status check.

Transmitted and received data
compare check.

09,02

Runt packet transmit and receive operation timeout.

09,02

Valid packet transmit and receive operation timeout.

Station Address
Verification

Device Interrupt
and Nonexistent
Memory

Set-up Mode and
Receive FI FO
Processing

Internal Loopback
and Address Filter

DEQNA-14

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS
~

)

Table 6

CQ Tests and Error Indications (Cont)

No. Test

RO Bits

Indications

12,02

Target address echoed data check.

14,02

Runt packet transmit and receive
operation status check.

14,02

Valid packet transmit and receive operation status
check.

12,09,02

Set-up packet operation time-out.

14,12,02

Set-up packet operation status check.

Long packet not detected via
transmit status.

Internal extended loopback transmit/receive data
compare check.

09,03

Test packet transmit or receive operation time-out.

14,03

General operation status check and long packet not
detected.

DMA Q-Bus interface transmit
(scatter/gather) data check.

09,04

Transmit (special) and receive operation time-out.

14,04

Receive or transmit operation status check.

Target address packet with LED
command echoed data check.

12,09

Set-up packet operation time-out.

14,12

Set-up packet operation status check.

CSR carrier bit on too long.

External loopback over Ethernet
cable is not operational.

Minimum or maximum sized packet data compare
check.

09,05

Minimum/maximum packet operation time-out.

14,05

Minimum/maximum packet operation status
check.

Internal Loopback
and Address Filter
(Continued)

Internal Extended
Loopback and
Protocol

DMA Q-Bus
Interface
Processing

Transceiver
Operation and
Status

External Loopback
and Ethernet
Protocol

DEQNA-15

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Successful Test Results - If the CQ test passes, the value of host register RO is zero, and the DEQNA
controller is set up as follows.
I.

All three LEDs are OFF.

All 14 target addresses are set to the physical address from the station address ROM.

The sanity timer is set to its default interval (4 minutes) and disabled or enabled according to
the disposition of the sanity timer jumper (W3).

Promiscuous and all multicast address modes are OFF.

The OEQNA controller has been reset:
a.
b.

Receive is enabled
Transmit is disabled

Failed Test Results - If the CQ test fails, the LEO indications display the errors listed in Table 5.
Bits in register RO indicate the test that failed. If bit 15 is the only bit set, the OEQNA controller passed
all the CQ tests except those that require a connected transceiver. CQ test error/bits (multiple bits can be
set) are defined in Table 7.

Table 7

CQ Test Error /Bit Definition

Error/Bit

Definition

Source(s)

External loopback not operational.

Tests 7 and 8

Ethernet network not operational.
H4000 transceiver not operational
(blown fuse, disconnected).
14

Operation complete status checks.
CSR status after final reset not
nominal.
CSR status after transmit and/or
recei ve not nominal.
Receive descriptor flags and status
word 1 not nominal.
Received byte length check.
Transmit descriptor flags and status
word 1 not nominal.
TOR value = 0

DEQNA-16

All tests

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS
\11

Table 7

CQ Test Error /Bit Definition (Cont)

Error/Bit

Definition

Source(s)

Sanity timer interrupt.

General error

Power failed during test.
Unexpected sanity timer interrupt.
12

Set-up packet or target address echo
check.

All tests

Set-up packet transmit time-out.
Transmit status not nominal.
Set-up packet receive time-out.
Receive status not nominal.
Echoed data not identical to
transmitted data.

)

Extra word at end of set-up packet
not nominal.
II

Spurious or missing device interrupt.

General error

Expected device interrupt not
detected.
Device did not detect nonexistent
memory (NXM) bus state.
18-bit or 22-bit addressing failure.
Unexpected DEQNA device interrupt.
10

Bus time-out or NXM interrupt.

General error

I/O page not accessible for read or
write.
Cannot read station address ROM.
Test code attempted to access NXM.
09

Device operation time-out.
Unit under test failed to complete
a transmit and/or receive in time.

DEQNA-17

All tests

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 7 CQ Test Error /Bit Definition (Cont)
Source(s)

Error/Bit

Definition

Undefined

Ethernet external loopback test
check.

Test 8

Ethernet protocol processing check.
Ethernet minimum valid length
processing check.
Ethernet maximum valid length
processing check.

DMA interface processing check.

Test 6

DMA odd/even length and address
processing check.
Multielement transmit descriptor
processing check.
Chained transmit descriptor
processing check.

Internal extended loopback transmit
buffer data check.

Test 5

Ethernet protocol processing check.
Transmit buffer memory malfunction.
Packet size processing error.

Station address compare test check.
Address filter logic passing all
addresses.
Address filter logic not passing
expected addresses.

DEQNA-18

Test 4

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 7 CQ Test Error /Bit Definition (Cont)
Error/Bit

Definition

Source(s)

Station address/receive FIFO
processing check.

Test 3

Target address RAM malfunction.
Packets not properly stored in
receive FIFO.
Receive FIFO memory malfunction.
00

Invalid Ethernet station address.
I/O page register read failure
(see also bit 10).
Unit under test is not a DEQNA
controller (M7504).
Station address ROM malfunction.
Invalid DEQNA address.

)

)
DEQNA-19

Test I

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Field Functional Test (ZQNA)
The Field Functional Diagnostic Program (ZQNA) tests the DEQNA controller in Q18- or Q22-Bus
systems. This test attempts to isolate faults to the following FRUs.
•
•
•
•
•

DEQNA controller
Bulkhead assembly
Bulkhead assembly fuse
Transceiver cable
Transceiver

The ZQNA also attempts to localize faults to the failing DEQNA functional area(s).
•
•
•
•

Q-Bus DMA Transfer Controller (QDTC)
Receive First-In/First-Out (FIFO) and transmit buffer memory
Ethernet Protocol Processor (EPP)
Manchester Encoder/Decoder (ED/DE)

Tests are executed under supervision of the XXDP /DRS, and controlled by the operator from a console
(hard copy or video). For DRS commands, refer to the XXDP+ User's Manual.
NOTE
The ZQNA diagnostic program is not an Ethernet
network exerciser. The ZQNA assures that the
module can execute Ethernet protocol and that valid
network traffic can be transmitted and received. The
network exerciser provides a higher level of testing.
Configuration and Set-Up - The DEQNA controller is tested in all loopback modes. The ZQNA tests the
DEQNA controller in internal loopback and internal extended loopback modes, with or without an
external loopback connector (H3278 or 12-22196-01) or transceiver connected (that is, a connected
transceiver or the loopback connector does not have to be unplugged). External loopback mode is used
with a connected transceiver or external loopback connector. The H4080 loopback test connector may be
used as the external loopback device.
NOTE
Executing ZQNA using externalloopback mode in a
system connected to a "live" Ethernet network does
not interrupt or disrupt the Ethernet network. Alternatively, externalloopback mode can be used with a
terminated transceiver that is not attached to a network cable.
Functional Areas Tested - Refer to Table 8.
Remove the sanity jumper (W3) to enable the timer before executing the sanity timer test (test number 21
in Table 9).
When the sanity timer test is complete, restore the jumper to its position before the test.

DEQNA-20

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

)

Table 8

ZQNA Tested Functional Areas
Loopback Mode

Functional Area *

Set-up

Internal

Q-Bus

QDTC

FIFO

x
x
x

ED/DE
EPP

Internal
Extended

x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x

EPP Address Checking Logic

Transceiver and Cables

)

*Q-Bus
QDTC
FIFO
ED/DE
EPP

External

Processor data bus
Q-Bus DMA transfer controller
Transmit and receive memory buffers
Manchester encoder/decoder
Ethernet protocol processor

Hardware Tested - Refer to Table 9.
Table 9
Test
Number

ZQNA Test Descriptions
Test

Hardware Tested

Nonexistent I/O Page
Register Test

• Q-Bus to DEQNA port register
interface

CSR Bit Test

• Q-Bus to DEQNA port register interface

Ethernet Station
Address Verify Test

• Station address PROM
• Q-Bus to DEQNA port register interface

Interrupt Vector
Address Test

• DEQNA vector address register
• Port registers

Boot/Diagnostic ROM
Checksum Test

• Q-Bus DMA interface
• 8051 microprocessor
.8051 ROM
• CSR
• Receive FIFO

)
DEQNA-21

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 9

ZQNA Test Descriptions (Coot)

Test
Number

Test

Hardware Tested

Interrupt Sanity Test

• Q-Bus QDIC interface
• CSR
• Q-Bus time-out logic
• QDTC interrupt logic

Ethernet Carrier Sense
Test

• Carrier sense circuitry
• ED/DE chip

Station Address RAM
Test

• Station address RAM
• Q-Bus QTDC interface
• CSR bit 00 (Receive Enable)
• Part of receive and transmit FIFO

Promiscuous Station
Test

• Promiscuous addressing mode
logic

Transmit and Receive
FIFO Memory Test

• Transmit buffer address logic
• Transmit buffer memory
• Receive FIFO address logic
• Receive FIFO memory

Packet Length Test

• Transmit and receive RAM

Descriptor List Address
and Interrupt Test

• Q-Bus to QTDC interface

Buffer Address and
Interrupt Test

• Q-Bus to QTDC interface

DMA Timing Test

• Internal extended loopback and transmit status

Long Packet Test

• Receive status

Odd Packet Test

• CSR bit 04, CSR bit 05, and transmit descriptor
bits

Station Address Test

• Address filter circuitry

All Multicast Station
Test

• All multicast addressing
• 8051 microprocessor
• Address filter circuitry

Runt Packet Test

• EPP
• Address filter circuitry

FIFO Overflow Test

• Receive status word 1, bit 14 (Error), bit 12
(Discard), bit 00 (Overflow), and EDLC byte
FIFO

Sanity Timer Test

• Sanity timer logic

DEQNA-22

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Operation - Tests are executed under the supervision of the XXDP/DRS. ZQNA specific prompts and
responses can be divided into three categories.

•
•
•

Start-up procedure (XXDP+)
Hardware questions
Software questions

Start-Up Procedure (XXDP+) -

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Boot XXDP+
Give the date
Type: R NAME (where NAME is the name of the program's BIN file)
Type: START
Type: Y (yes) in response to the CHANGE HW prompt
Answer all hardware questions
Type: Y (yes) in response to CHANGE SW prompt
Answer all software questions

This procedure uses only the defaults for flags and software parameters.
Hardware Questions - When a diagnostic is started, the DRS begins a dialog with ~he operator and
requests hardware information with the prompt.

CHANGE HW (L) ?

Y (yes) is the correct response after a START command, unless hardware information has been preloaded
using the Set-Up Utility (see XXDP+ User's Manual).
When a Y response is received, the DRS requests the
number of units.

The DRS then requests the following information for each unit.

# OF DEVICES (D)?

The response is the number of units to be tested (no
default). This response determines the number of times
the following information is requested. One device must
be specified.

DEQNA I/O PAGE ADR

The response is the address of the I/O page register
assigned for one of the DEQNA devices. The legal I/O
page addresses are 174440 and 174460.

(0) 174440 ?

INTERRUPT VECTOR ADR
(0) 700?

The response is the DEQNA interrupt vector address.
The interrupt vector address is 700 (octal) for the
DEQNA controller at I/O page address 174440, and
704 (octal) for the DEQNA controller at I/O page
address 174460.

Software Questions - After the hardware questions are answered, or following a RESTART or CONTINUE command, the DRS sets up a dialog with the operator and requests software parameters. These
parameters govern some diagnostic-specific operation modes. The prompt is:

CHANGE SW (L) ?

The response is Y (yes) to change any parameter.

DEQNA-23

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Three software questions follow. The first question is:
DO YOU WANT TO TEST
SANITY TIMER (L)

If the response is Y (yes), the DRS displays two
additional prompts:

•

IS SANITY TIMER JUMPER
ENABLED/CUT (L) ?

The response is Y (yes) if the sanity timer jumper is
removed; otherwise, remove the jumper and then type
Y.

•

SANITY TIMER TIMEOUT
VALUE (O)?

The response is a numerical time-out value (between

o and 7) that represents the time-out period (refer to
Table 10).

The second question is:
EXECUTE TESTS IN
INTERNAL/EXTENDED
LOOPBACK MODE (L)?

Y (yes) response causes test to execute in internal
extended loopback modes. N (no) response
causes the test to execute in internal and external loopback modes.

The third question is:
SYSTEM HAS BLOCK-MODE
MEMORY (L)?

The response is Y (yes) if the system has a block-mode
memory, and N (no) if it has a non block-mode
memory.

Table 10

Sanity Timer Time-Out Values

Time-Out
Value

Time-Out
Period

1/4 second
1 second
4 seconds
16 seconds
1 minute
4 minutes
16 minutes
64 minutes

I
2

3
4
5
6
7

DEQNA-24

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Error Reporting - A diagnostic can issue general and specific types of error messages.
General error messages are always printed unless the IBE and/or IER flag is set, and have the format
shown in Figure 5.

NAME

ER_ TYPE

NAME
ER _ TYPE
ER _ NO
UNIT _ NO
TEST _ NO
PC _ ADDR

= DIAGNOSTIC NAME

UNIT _

ER_NO

TEST _

PC_ADDR

= ERROR TYPE (ALL ERRORS ARE HARD ERRORS)
= ERROR NUMBER
=0

= TEST AND SUBTEST WHERE ERROR OCCURRED
= PROGRAM COUNTER CONTENTS
MKV85-1151

Figure 5

General Error Message Format

General error messages may include two sublevels: basic error messages and extended error messages.
Basic Error Messages
•

Printed after the associated general error message.

•
•

Contain some additional information about the error.
Always printed unless one or more DRS error flags (IBE, IXE, IER) are set.

Extended Error Messages
•

Printed after the associated general error message and any associated basic error message.

•

Contain some additional error information, such as register contents or good/bad data.

•

Always printed unless either the IXE or IER flag (or both) is set.

The format of a typical extended error message is shown in Figure 6.

TRANSMIT DESCRIPTOR LIST

RECEIVE DESCRIPTOR LIST

FLAG WORD
LOW-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
HIGH-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
STATUS WORD 1
STATUS WORD 2

FLAG WORD
LOW-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
HIGH-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
STATUS WORD 1
STATUS WORD 2
MKV85-1152

Figure 6

Typical Extended Error Message Format

DEQNA-25

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Specific error messages are defined as needed. The following are examples of possible error messages.
Device fatal error messages:
CSR REGISTER FAILED TO RESPOND
NO INTERRUPT FROM DEQNA
Return status messages:
TRANSMIT STATUS ERROR
RECEIVE STATUS ERROR
CSR STATUS ERROR

DEQNA-26

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

DEQNA DEC/Xll Exerciser (XQNA)
The DEQNA DEC/XII Exerciser (DEQNA DEC/XII Module) exercises one DEQNA controller at
maximum activity rates in order to provoke:
•
•
•

Noise
Timing
Logical interaction failures

The DEQNA DEC/X II Exerciser transmits and receives random length packets (using 18- or 22-bit
physical address space). The DEQNA controller transmits and receive::; the same packet.
One pass of the exerciser consists of:
•
•
•

1000 iterations of transmitting a packet.
1000 iterations of receiving a packet.
Comparing the contents of the transmit packet to the receive packet.

In addition:
•
•
•
•

Packet length is random for each iteration.
Transmit status words are checked for correct contents.
Receive status words are checked for correct contents.
CSR status is checked for correct contents.

The DEQNA controller is dropped from further testing if one of the following occurs:
•
•
•
•
•

The DEQNA controller does not reset properly.
The CSR and/or the receive and/or transmit status word(s) are in error.
A hard error occurs.
A transmit and/or receive interrupt is not generated.
The transceiver is disconnected while in external loopback mode.

Internal extended loopback mode is the default mode of operation.
Configuration and Set-Up - Both the DEQNA Citizenship test and the Field Functional test must have
run successfully before running the DEQNA DEC/X II Exerciser. The default parameters are:
Device address: 174440
Interrupt Vector: 700
BR level: 5
Number of devices: I
The holdoff jumper (W2) must be removed and the sanity jumper (W3) must be in place (both jumpers as
shipped).
To run the DEQNA DEC/X II Exerciser in externalloopback, the DEQNA controller under test must be
connected to the transceiver, or the externalloopback connector must be connected.
Software register I (SW I) bit a and I options are described in Table II.

\
)
DEQNA-27

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 11

DEQNA DEC/XII Exerciser Software Register Bits

Bit
1

Position
0

X
0

Description
Exerciser runs in internal extended loopback mode (default). Transceiver is not
needed.
Exerciser runs in external loopback mode. Transceiver or external loop back connector is required.

Print error messages.

Do not print error messages.
NOTE
X indicates that the bit can be either a 1 or a O.

Commands - To set external loopback mode, type:
MOD QNAAO 16<RETURN>
I <RETURN>
To test a DEQNA controller in the second slot (address 174460) after the exerciser has been loaded, type:
MOD QNAAO 6<RETURN>
174460<LINE FEED>
704<RETURN>
For additional information refer to the DEC/Xii User's Manual, AC-F053C-MC.

DEQNA-28

DEQNA DIAGNOSTICS

Error Messages - Error messages print the contents of the DEQNA descriptor lists in the order shown in
Figure 7.
NOTE
Transmit and receive descriptor lists are not printed
with a DEQNA WILL NOT RESET error message.

DEaNA - "ERROR MESSAGE"
TRANSMIT DESCRIPTOR LIST

RECEIVE DESCRIPTOR LIST

FLAG WORD
LOW-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
HIGH-ORDER ADDRESS BITS
PACKET LENGTH
STATUS WORD 1
STATUS WORD 2

DEaNA CSR REGISTER
DEaNA I/O PAGE ADDRESS

"ERROR MESSAGE" IS ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
DEaNA WILL NOT RESET
DEaNA- BAD DEaNA STATUS
DEaNA - BAD RECEIVE STATUS
DEaNA - BAD TRANSMIT STATUS
DEaNA - XMIT PACKET LENGTH NOT = RCV PACKET LENGTH
DEaNA - ATTEMPT TO ACCESS NONEXISTENT MEMORY LOC
MKV85-1153

Figure 7

DEQNA DECjX 11 Exerciser Error Message
Format

DEQNA-29

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Corrective maintenance is performed by FRU replacement. The following are the FRUs for the DEQNA
controller.
I.
2.
3.
4.

M7504 module
Bulkhead cable assembly
Bulkhead fuse
Ampere filter (if used)
NOTE
When the module is replaced, the user may be able
to retain the original Ethernet address by swapping
the station address PROM from the replaced module to the new module, and verifying with diagnostics
that the original station address PROM works in the
new module.

Corrective Maintenance
Replace the failed FRU as indicated by the error code returned by the Citizenship test in RO or the error
indicated by the Field Functional test.

DEQNA-30

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting
The following flow diagram (Figure 8) provides a typical troubleshooting sequence.

LOG AS "NO PROBLEM
FOUND"'
!
RETURN SYSTEM TO
CUSTOMER

MKV85-1154

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

)
DEQNA-31

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

INSTALL MODULE
LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
(70-21489-01 )

RERUN DIAGNOSTIC.
OR TEST INDICATING
ERROR

NO
LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
(70-21489-01 )

RECONNECT BULKHEAD
CABLE. INSTALL
BULKHEAD CONNECTOR
(H3278OR 12-22196-01)

MKV85-1155

Figure 8

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DEQNA-32

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

IF ALL FRUs TEST O.K .•
GET ASSISTANCE FROM
SUPPORT

AFTER REPAIR. VERIFY
PROPER SYSTEM
OPERATION

MKV85-1156

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

)
DEQNA-33

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REMOVE BULKHEAD
LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
(H3278 OR 12-22196-01)

RECONNECT CABLE TO
NEXT COMPONENT OF
ETHERNET NETWORK

GO TO APPROPRIATE
FLOWCHART FOR NEXT
COMPONENT IN
NETWORK

MKV85-1157

Figure 8

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DEQNA-34

DEQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DEQNA Tech Tips/FCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DEQNA Q-bus data communications
controller.
Table 12

DEQNA Tech Tips/FCO Index

Tech
Tip No.

Title

Speed
Bulletin

TT2A

DEQNA Compatibility

420

)
DEQNA-35

DEREP INSTALLATION

DEREP ETHERNET REPEATER
General Description
The Ethernet repeater (hereafter referred to as the repeater):
•

Provides a means of extending Ethernet networks beyond the 500 m (1640 ft) limit of a single
Ethernet coaxial cable segment.

•

Consists of a single unit containing logic module and power supply.

•

Resides between two Ethernet cable segments and is connected to each of them via a transceiver
cable and Ethernet transceiver.

•

Transmits Ethernet signals from one cable segment to another while maintaining synchronization across the network.

DEREP Versions
•

DEREP-AA - Local repeater links segments separated by not more than 100 m (328 ft) using
two transceiver cables up to 50 m (164 ft) in length.
Includes a single repeater box containing a logic module and power supply.

•

DEREP-RC/RD - Remote repeater links segments separated by not more than 1100 m
(3609 ft) using a fiber-optic link up to 1000 m (3281 ft) in length and two transceiver cables up
to 50 m (164 ft) in length.

•

DEREP-RH/RJ - Remote repeater links segments separated by not more than 1100 m (3609 ft)
using a fiber-optic link up to 1000 m (3281 ft) in length and two transceiver cables up to 50 m
(164 ft) in length.

DEREP-I

DEREPINSTALLATION

FIBER-OPTIC CABLE
CONNECTORS
(USED ON REMOTE
REPEATERS ONLY)
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE INPUT A

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE INPUT B
(NOT USED ON
REMOTE REPEATERS)

NOTE
A SECOND IDENTICAL
BOX IS USED WITH THE
REMOTE REPEATER

MKV85-1175

Figure 1 Ethernet Repeater

DEREP-2

DEREP INSTALLATION

DEREP Configuration Considerations
•

Both local and remote repeaters attach to the Ethernet cable through an H4000 transceiver or
equivalent.

•

The repeater is never used to connect to a Broadband Ethernet configuration.

•

The repeater is never connected to a DELNI unit in any mode. Repeaters and DELNI units can
be connected to the same cable through H4000 transceivers (refer to Figure 2).

•

When configuring local and remote repeaters, up to 100 repeaters may be in a system configuration. The following rules apply (refer to Figure 3):
All repeaters have one side (port) attaching to the same coaxial cable segment. This
segment is often referred to as the central or backbone segment. Up to 100 repeaters can
be attached to this segment.
A local repeater is made up of two transceiver cables, each connected to an H4000
transceiver, and then to two separate Ethernet cable segments. Either of these transceiver
cables can be up to 50 m (164 ft) in length.
Remote repeaters consist of two units. Each unit attaches to the appropriate cable segment
via a transceiver cable [up to 50 m (164 ft) in length] and an H4000 transceiver. A fiberoptic cable up to 1000 m (3281 ft) in length connects the two units together.
If a single remote repeater is used, the maximum length of fiber-optic cable that can be
used is 1000 m (3281 ft).
If multiple remote repeaters are used, the maximum aggregate length of fiber-optic cable
in any station-to-station path is 1000 m (3281 ft).

DEREP-3

DEREPINSTALLATION

MKV85·1176

Figure 2

DEREP Example Configurations

DEREP-4

DEREPINSTALLATION

CABLE
FIBER-OPTIC

SEGMENT 5
LINK 2
(SEE NOTE)

NOTE
LENGTH OF FIBER-OPTIC CABLE IN LINK 1 PLUS
LENGTH OF FIBER-OPTIC CABLE IN LINK 2 SHOULD
BE 1000 M (3281 FT) OR LESS.
MKY85·1133

Figure 3 Typical Repeater Installation

DEREP-5

DEREPINSTALLATION

DEREP Components
The following parts are supplied with each repeater.
Table 1

DEREP Components

Model

Owner's
Manual

Power
Cord

DEREP-AA

DEREP-AB
DEREP-RC

Country
Kit

X
X

DEREP-RD

DEREP-RH

DEREP-RJ

Country Kits
The non-U.S. versions of both the local and remote repeaters require country kits (U.S. versions do not
require a country kit). Each kit contains installation instructions and a power cord. Non-U.S. local
repeaters require one country kit, and non-U.S. remote repeaters require two. For cases where the country
in which the repeater is to be used is not listed, select a country kit that uses the same plug configuration.
Table 2 lists the DEREP kits and ordering codes.
Table 2

Ethernet Repeaters and Country Kit Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Local Repeaters
DEREP-AA
DEREP-AB

U.S.
Non-U.S.
Remote Repeaters

DEREP-RC, DEREP-RH
DEREP-RD, DEREP-RJ

U.S.
Non-U.S.
Local Repeater Country Kits

DEREK-AZ
DEREK-AB
DEREK-AQ
DEREK-AC
DEREK-AD
DEREK-AF
DEREK-AP
DEREK-AG
DEREK-AH

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland

DEREP-6

DEREPINSTALLATION
Table 2

Ethernet Repeaters and Country Kit Order Codes (Con"t)

Option

Order Code

Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)
United Kingdom
United States

DEREK-AI
DEREK-AN
DEREK-AS
DEREK-AM
DEREK-AL
DEREK-AK
DEREK-AE
None Required

Remote Repeater Country Kits
Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)
United Kingdom
United States

DEREK-RZ
DEREK-RB
DEREK-RQ
DEREK-RC
DEREK-RD
DEREK-RF
DEREK-RP
DEREK-RG
DEREK-RH
DEREK-RI
DEREK-RN
DEREK-RS
DEREK-RM
DEREK-RL
DEREK-RK
DEREK-RE
None Required

Reference Documentation
Title

Document Number

DEREP Ethernet Repeater Technical Manual

EK-DEREP-TM

DEREP-AA Local Ethernet Repeater Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DEREP-IN

DEREP-RA Remote Ethernet Repeater Installation/ Owner's Manual

EK-DERRP-IN

DEREP Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-01810-01

Fiber Optic Attenuator Installation/Configuration Reference Card

EK-DEFOE-RC

DEREP-7

DEREP INSTALLATION

Local and Remote Device Placement (Figures 4 and 5)

•

Make sure the necessary cables reach the repeater without being strained.

•

Place the repeater within 1.83 m (6 ft) of the electrical outlet.
NOTE
Place non-U.S. versions within 2.5 m (7.61 ft).

1.83 m

CABLES TO TRANSCEIVERS
OR ETHERJACK CONNECTION
BOXES.
NOTE
MAKE SURE THAT TRANSCEIVERS
OR ETHERJACK CONNECTION BOXES
USED SERVE DIFFERENT NETWORK
::;~GMENTS.

MKV85·1177

Figure 4

Typical Local Repeater Cabling
DEREP-8

ATTENUATOR LABEL

FIBER OPTIC
CABLE
RECEIVE

!(
~

tTl

;;0

tTl
""0

-.0

AC POWER CORD

A
liJ.

~83m
;6:ft)

AC
CORD
POWER
CABLE
(1000 M MAX)

MKVBB-1997

Figure 5

Typical Remote Repeater Cabling

t:l

t'!'j

'~='
""0

>
~
~

>
...,
o
z

DEREPINSTALLATION

Power Requirements

Local Repeater
•

115 Vac @ 1 A (50/60 Hz)

•

230 Vac @ 0.5 A (50/60 Hz)

Remote Repeater (each standalone package)
•

115 Vac @ 2.5 A (50/60 Hz)

•

230 Vac @ 1.25 Vac (50/60 Hz)

Preinstallation Steps

Position the repeater on a desk, shelf, or table top.

Verify access to ac power.

Determine which transceiver cables or which Ethernet connectors will be used.

Ensure that all cables can be connected without straining the cables.

Ensure that the total cable length between the repeater and either transceiver does not exceed 50 m
(164 ft).

Ensure that the network being configured with the repeater follows Ethernet configuration guidelines.

For remote installations, a duplex fiber-optic cable must be installed. The cable should be tested via the
fiber-optic link certification procedure. This procedure is found in Appendix B of the DEBET
Technical Manual (EK-DEBET-TM), DECconnect Facilities Cabling Guide (EK-DECSY-FC), and
shipped with new and upgraded FOTEC kits. The cable ends must be properly marked, identifying
transmit and receive cable ends.

Allow a minimum of 10.16 cm (4 in) clearance per side to ensure proper ventilation and to prevent
damage to any cables attached to the rear panel of the repeater.

A void locating the repeater in areas such as cable trenches or on the floor where dust or other
material is likely to interfere with proper fan ventilation.

* FOTEC kits are produced by FOTEC, Inc.

DEREP-IO

DEREPINSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagrams

-{:

DEVICE PLACEMENT
POWER REQUIREMENTS
PREINSTALLATION STEPS

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (REFER TO
TABLE 1)

CONNECT CABLES AND
LOCK IN PLACE (SEE
FIGURE 4)

SET STANDBY MODE
SWITCH TO THE "0"
(DISABLED) POSITION
(SEE FIGURE 8)

MKV85-1179

Figure 6

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Local Repeater

(Sheet 1 of 5)

DEREP-II

DEREP INSTALLATION

SET POWER SWITCH TO
THE "1" (ON) POSITION

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND 4

REPEATER LED TEST.
PRESS AND HOLD DOWN
SELF-TEST SWITCH

(SEE FIGURE 10)

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND4

MKV86-0551

Figure 6

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Local Repeater
(Sheet 2 of 5)

DEREP-12

DEREPINSTALLATION

RELEASE
SELF-TEST
SWITCH.

*ONLY LOCAL
REPEATERS MAY BE
NO

USED IN STANDBY
MODE. STANDBY
REPEATER IS TYPICALLY
INSTALLED IN PARALLEL
WITH A PRIMARY
REPEATER

PRESS AND RELEASE
THE SELF-TEST SWITCH.

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND 4

USING NETWORK PROTOC. OL VERIFY
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NODES
THAT NORMALLY COMMUNICATE VIA
-{
THE PRIMARY REPEATERS.

MKV86-0554

Figure 6

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Local Repeater

(Sheet 3 of 5)

DEREP-13

DEREPINSTALLATION

TURN PRIMARY
REPEATER POWER OFF

SET STANDBY MODE
SWITCH TO "'"
(ENABLED) POSITION.
(SEE FIGURE 8)

{

SET POWER SWITCH TO
"'" (ON) POSITION

{

CAUTION:
THE STANDBY MODE SWITCH OF
BOTH
REPEATERS
(PRIMARY
&
STANDBY) MUST NOT BE SET TO THE
SAME POSITION.

TANDBY REPEATER BECOMES ACTIVE
AFTER EIGHT FULL PACKETS HAVE NOT
BEEN REPEATED BY THE PRIMARY
REPEATER.

STANDBY REPEATER
TEST. PRIMARY
REPEATER POWER
SWITCH MUST BE OFF.

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3 AND 4.

MKV85-1182

Figure 6

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Local Repeater

(Sheet 4 of 5)

DEREP-14

DEREPINSTALLATION

_
{

USING NETWORK PROTOCOL VERIFY
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NODES
THAT NORMALLY COMMUNICATE VIA
THE PRIMARY REPEATERS.

REPLACE STANDBY
REPEATER

TURN PRIMARY
REPEATER POWER ON.
STANDBY REPEATER
RETURNS TO INACTIVE
STATE. ACT LED ON
STANDBY REPEATER
GOES TO OFF.

MKV85-1183

Figure 6

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Local Repeater
(Sheet 5 of 5)

DEREP-15

DEREPINSTALLATION

--{:

DEVICE PLACEMENT
POWER REQUIREMENTS
PREINSTALLATION STEPS

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (REFER TO
TABLE 1)

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO CONNECTOR
"A" AND LOCK IN PLACE
(SEE FIGURES 5 AND 11)

CONNECT FIBER-OPTIC
CABLE AS SHOWN IN
FIGURE 14

SET STANDBY MODE
SWITCH TO THE "0"
(DISABLED) POSITION
(SEE FIGURE 8)

MKV85-1184

Figure 7

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Remote Repeater
(Sheet 1 of 4)

DEREP-16

DEREPINSTALLATION

VERIFY VOLTAGE
SETIING (SEE FIGURE
9)

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND4

MKV85-1185

Figure 7 DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Remote Repeater
(Sheet 2 of 4)

DEREP-17

DEREPINSTALLATION

CAUTION
DO NOT TRY THE
REPEATER CHECKOUT
UNTIL BOTH REPEATERS
ARE FULLY CONNECTED
AND TURNED ON.

REPEAT THESE STEPS
FOR THE SECOND
REPEATER

REPEATER LED TEST.
PRESS AND HOLD DOWN
SELF-TEST SWITCH
(SEE FIGURE 11)

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND 4

MKV85-1186

Figure 7

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Remote Repeater

(Sheet 3 of 4)

DEREP-18

DEREP INSTALLATION

REPEATER SELF-TEST.
RELEASE THE SELF-TEST
SWITCH

TURN OFF REPEATER.
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES 3
AND4

MKV85-1187

Figure 7

DEREP Installation Flow Diagram - Remote Repeater
(Sheet 4 of 4)

DEREP-19

DEREPINSTALLATION

FOR A PRIMARY
REPEATER, SLIDE THE
SWITCH SO THAT "0"
IS VISIBLE IN THE
WINDOW

FOR A STANDBY
(BACKUP) REPEATER,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO
THAT "'" IS VISIBLE IN
THE WINDOW

MKV85·1188

Figure 8 Standby Mode Switch Setting

DEREP-20

DEREP INST ALLA TION

FOR 110 V/115 V/120 V:
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO
THAT "115" IS VISIBLE IN
THE WINDOW.

FOR 220 V/230 V/240 V:
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO
THAT "230" IS VISIBLE IN
THE WINDOW.

MKV85-1189

Figure 9

DEREP Voltage Setting

DEREP-21

DEREPINSTALLATION

FUSE
"8"

TRANSCEIVER
CONNECTOR
"A"

TRANSCEIVER
CONNECTOR
"8"

FUSE
"8" LED

SELF-TEST
SWTICH
INDICATOR
LEOS

"0" CONNECTORS

MKV85-1190

Figure 10

Local Repeater Rear Panel

FIBER-OPTIC
CONNECTORS

FUSE
"8"

(RECEIVE)

FUSE
"8" LED

fF~OOO
TRANSCEIVER
CONNECTOR

"A"

TRANSCEIVER
CONNECTOR
"8" (NOT USED)

FUSE
"A"

FUSE
"A" LEO

\
SELF-TEST
SWTICH

~------~------~)

INDICATOR
LEOS

"0" CONNECTORS

TK-l0930

Figure II

Remote Repeater Rear Panel

DEREP-22

DEREP INST ALLATION

FOR THE LOCAL REPEATER,
THE "Act" LIGHT MAY BE ON
IF "Standby" SWITCH IS IN THE
"1" (STANDBY MODE ENABLED)
POSITION (ON POWER-UP)
FOR THE REMOTE REPEATER,
THE "Act" LIGHT IS ON,
SET THE "Standby" SWITCH
TO THE "0" (DISABLED)
POSITION (ON POWER-UP)

= ON
• = OFF

o = MAY BE ON OR OFF OR BLINKING

--------·B--..~

e: 6): 0 a.f;.... a.

. .__
IN.D.IC.A.T.IN.G__N.E.TW
__
O.R.K.T.R.A.FF.IC.·________________
A

2.0A

5V
••••

MKV85-1191

Figure 12

Local/Remote Repeater LEDs on Powerup and Self-Test

DEREP-23

DEREPINSTALLATION

= ON

• = OFF
A

2.0A

•••• •• •••••••
CD Seg 12V Tst Fit Err CPT

CD Seg 5V Int Act Err CPT

SELF-TEST BUTTON

MKV85-1192

Figure 13

Local and Remote Repeater LED Test

DEREP-24

DEREPINSTALLATION

ATTENUATOR LABEL
ON TX SIDE

BEND RADIUS
15 eM (6 IN.)

MKV88·1996

Figure 14

Remote Repeater Fiber-Optic Cable C onnectlOns
.

DEREP-25

DEREP CABLING

Fiber-Optic Attenuator
The fiber-optic attenuator (PIN 12-30068-01) is a device that induces a loss of 3 dB in a fiber optic system.
The attenuator is designed to be used for 100/140 fiber optic link that is 1000 m (3281 ft) or less.
The attenuator is installed when a DEREP-RH/Rl is connected to another DEREP-RH/Rl or to a
DEBET-RH/Rl (Figure 15).

NOTES
If a special condition exists and more budget is

required, the attenuator can be removed. This
increases the budget by 3 dB.
Do NOT install the attenuator for 100/140 fiberoptic link beyond 1000 m (3281 ft).
Do NOT install the attenuator for 50/125,
62.5/125, and 85/125 fiber-optic links.

ATTENUATOR IS INSTALLED
ON BOTH SI DES

RX
~ 1000 M OR LESS ~

100/140 FIBER
DEREP - RH/RJ OR
DEBET- RH/RJ

DEREP-RH/RJ

MKV88-1999

Figure 15

Attenuator Installed on Both Sides

DEREP-26

DEREP CABLING
The attenuator is also installed when a DEREP-RH/RJ is connected to a DEREP-RC/RD or to a
DEBET-RC/RD (Figure 16).

NOTES
Install the attenuator on one side only by attaching
the attenuator to the output (transmit) connector on
the DEREP-RH/RJ.
If an older DEREP-RC/RD is being used with a

newer DEREP-RH/RJ, the guidelines and budgets of
the DEREP-RC/RD must be followed. Refer to the
DEREP Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide,
(EK-DEREP-UG).
ATTENUATORIS INSTALLED
ON ONE SIDE ONLY

RX
~ 1 000 M OR LESS ~

100/140 FIBER
DEREP- RH/RJ

DEREP-RC/RD OR
DEBET - RC/RD

MKV88-1998

Figure 16

Attenuator Installed on DEBET-RH/RJ Side Only

DEREP-27

DEREP CABLING
Installation Guidelines
Use the following guidelines and the flowchart in Figure 17 to install the attenuator on the DEREP-RH/RJ.
•

Install the attenuator between the fiber.:.optic cable connector (SMA 906) and the TX connector
on the DEREP-RH/RJ unit.

•

Install only one attenuator per unit.

•

Install attenuators on both TX connectors if both units are DEREP-RH/RJs.

•

Label the fiber optic (TX) "3 dB".

•

Do NOT install the attenuator into the RX end of the fiber optic cable.

•

Do NOT install attenuators on both ends of the same fiber-optic cable.

•

Do NOT install the attenuator on a DEREP-RC/RD unit.

DEREP-28

DEREP CABLING

DEREP-RHjRJ Attenuator Installation Flowchart

START

t
REMOVE THE
PROTECTIVE CAPS
FROM THE FIBER
OPTIC CABLE
CONNECTORS AND
FROM THE
DEREP-RH/RJ FIBER
OPTIC CONNECTORS.

1
REMOVE THE
ATTENUATOR FROM
THE PLASTIC BAG. •

t
INSTALL THE
ATTENUATOR
BETWEEN THE SOURCE
(TX) FIBER OPTIC
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
AND THE FIBER OPTIC
CABLE CONNECTOR
(SMA 906). (SEE
FIGURE 18) .• *

~
CONNECT THE FIBER
OPTIC CABLE.
FINGER-TIGHTEN THE
FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTORS.

t
PLACE ATTENUATOR

* CAUTION

LABEL ON THE
TRANSMIT CABLE OF

THE ATTENUATOR MUST BE KEPT FREE OF DIRT
AND DUST TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION

THE FIBER OPTIC
CABLE. (SEE FIGURE
5) .

• * NOTE
THE ATTENUATOR MAY FALL FROM THE CONNECTOR
DURING INSTALLATION. BEFORE SCREWING THE
CABLE INTO THE CONNECTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ATTENUATOR IS STILL IN PLACE.

+
STOP
MKV88·2000

Figure 17

DEREP-RH/RJ Attenuator Installation Flowchart

DEREP-29

DEREP CABLING

ATTENUATOR

\
n
-I.~ -U(SMA 906 CONNECTOR)

HALF
DELRIN

FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTOR

SOURCE
(TX)

MKV88-1844

Figure 18

Installing the Attenuator

DEREP-30

DEREP DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the repeater. The repeater self-test performs DEREP
checkout. The self-test is done on two levels.

•

Internal loopback is performed when the repeater is turned ON. Figures 19 and 20 diagram the
loopback tests.

•

Internal and external loopback are both performed when the self-test switch is momentarily
pressed and released. Figures 19 and 20 diagram the loopback tests.

ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER

"A"
EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST

"A"
TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE

LOGIC
MODULE

"S"
TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE

"S"

EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST

ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER
TK-l0911

Figure 19

Local Repeater Self-Test Diagram

DEREP-31

DEREP DIAGNOSTICS

r-----r--

ETHERNET

TRANSCEIVER

....---.....I. AI.o..- - - - . .

EXTERNAL

TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE

SELF-TEST

-r---

SIDE 2
LOGIC
MODULE

EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST

---r-

··lA
..

INTERNAL

_~:I:~____

FIBER-OPTIC
INTERFACE

"B"
SIDE 2

EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST
"B"

FIBER-OPTIC
INTERFACE

SIDE 1
LOGIC
MODULE

--I:l:~----r-SELF-TEST

___ i __

"A"
TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE

~~crHERNcr~
... _

TRANSCEIVER

EXTERNAL
SELF-TEST

I___

_______________

MKV85-1194

Figure 20

Remote Repeater Self-Test Diagram

DEREP-32

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Maintenance Aids
Equipment Required •

For local repeaters, fault isolation to the FRU may be achieved by using the state indicator LEOs
on the rear of the repeater. Figure 21 contains the LED definitions.

•

For remote repeaters, a fiber-optic turnaround test connector may be required for some fault
isolation procedures.

•

The fiber-optic turnaround test connector is a 15.24 cm (6.0 in) fiber-optic cable loop

(PIN 29-25037-00 or P IN 29~24865-00). This test connector replaces the fiber-optic cable for
off-line external loop back testing of a remote repeater.
Optional Equipment •

An H4080 test connector replaces the on-line transceiver for off-line self-testing of the repeater.

•

An H4000-TA (or TB) Ethernet transceiver tester transmits a packet onto an Ethernet coaxial
segment (via a transceiver), then monitors the transmission via a second transceiver and verifies
network operation.

Preventive Maintenance •

Involves periodic use of the repeater self-test (see Figures 19 and 20).

•

The self-test should be exercised when network PM is performed.

Field Replaceable Units - See Figures 2Q. through 26 for repeater disassembly and FRU removal.

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock and damage to components, turn OFF power and disconnect all cables
attached to the repeater before opening the chassis.

DEREP-33

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

2.0A

Tst

o 0000000

CD Seg 12V Tst Fit Err CPT

COLOR

DEFINITION

2.0A

GREEN

FUSE A FUNCTIONING

2.0A

GREEN

FUSE B FUNCTIONING

GREEN

CARRIER RECEIVED ON BAND TRANSMITIED TO A

LED #

CD Seg 5V Int Act Err CPT

0000000

SEG

YELLOW

REPEATER WAS SEGMENTED ON SIDE A

12V

GREEN

+12 VOLT SUPPLY FUNCTIONING

TST

RED

EXECUTING SELF-TEST

FLT

RED

CURRENTLY SEGMENTED

ERR

RED

EXTERNAL SELF-TEST ERROR ON SIDE A

CPT

RED

CPT ERROR ON SIDE A

GREEN

CARRIER RECEIVED ON A AND TRANSMITIED TO B

SEG

YELLOW

REPEATER WAS SEGMENTED ON SIDE B

GREEN

+5 VOLT SUPPLY FUNCTIONING

INT

RED

EXECUTING INTERNAL SELF-TEST

ACT

RED

STANDBY ACTIVE

ERR

RED

EXTERNAL SELF-TEST ERROR ON SIDE B

CPT

RED

CPT ERROR ON SIDE B
MKV84·0050

Figure 21

LED Definitions

DEREP-34

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

POWER SUPPLY MODULE
METAL CHASSIS
COVER
POWER SUPPLY
CHASSIS'
PIN 70-19499
PIN 54-16053
FAN

LOWER METAL
CHASSIS

CHASSIS INCLUDES:
• METAL CHASSIS
COVER
• POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
• POWER SUPPLY
COVER
• POWER SUPPLY
INTERCONNECT
CABLE
•

LOGIC
MODULE •
PIN 54-15586

/~
l
FILLER PANEL
BOTTOM COVER

• = FRU
•• = SUPPLIED WITH REMOTE REPEATERS ONLY
MKV84-0041

Figure 22

Repeater FRU Locations

DEREP-35

FAN

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

TOP METAL
CHASIS COVER

PULL UP

BOTTOM METAL
CHASIS COVER

MKV85·1195

Figure 23

Top Cover Removal/Opening and Closing the Internal Metal Chassis

DEREP-36

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

SCREWS \

I
FIBER-OPTIC MODULE

LOGIC MODULE

FIBER-OPTIC MODULE
CONNECTOR

TK-l0931

Figure 24

Fiber-Optic Module Removal and Replacement

DEREP-37

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

LOGIC MODULE

PLASTIC

LOGIC MODULE

TK-l0924

Figure 25

Logic Module Removal and Replacement

DEREP-38

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

POWER SUPPLY COVER

POWER SU PPLY
MODULE

FAN

POWER SUPPLY
INTERCONNECT

FAN
CONNECTOR

TOP COVER

TK-l0927

Figure 26

Power Supply Chassis

DEREP-39

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3 LEDs and Troubleshooting
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

2.0A

FUSE A

Indications/ Corrective Action
This (green) LED indicates that the + 12 V transceiver
power fuse on side A is good.
When OFF, this indicates that either the fuse is blown
or that + 12 V is not reaching the fuseholder.
1.

Check the fuse. If blown, replace it with correct
fuse
(2 A - Digital Equipment Corporation part
,number 90-07215-00).

If the fuse continues to blow, try connecting to
a different transceiver or transceiver cable.

Check other indicators (5V and 12V LEDs) to
determine that the repeater is properly powered.

Verify that the power switch is ON, and that
the power cord is connected to the proper voltage source. Check the line fuse (refer to Note 1
at the end of this table).

2.0A

FUSE B

Similar to 2.0A (side A)

+5 volts

This (green) LED indicates that the +5 V circuit of the
power supply is functioning.
When OFF, this may indicate that the +5 V circuit is
not functioning.
1.

Check the 12V LED to determine whether the
power supply is functioning.

Check the FUSE A and FUSE B LEDs. These
LEDs indicate that +12 V is being supplied to
the transceivers.

Verify that the power switch is ON and that the
power cord is connected to the proper voltage
source. Check the line fuse (refer to Note 1 at
the end of this table).

DEREP-40

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 3
LED
Name

12V

LED
Definition

+12 volts

LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)

Normal
State

Indications/Corrective Action
4.

Press the self-test button. All LEDs should
light while the button is pressed. If all LEDs
(with the exception of the 5V LED) turn ON,
the 5V LED is defective. Replace the logic
module.

If the above procedures do not correct the problem, replace the power supply.

This (green) LED indicates that the + 12 V circuit of
the power supply is functioning.
When OFF, this indicates that the +12 V circuit is not
functioning.
1.

Check the 5V LED to determine that ac power
is reaching the power supply.

Check the FUSE A and FUSE B LEDs. These
LEDs indicate that +12 V is being supplied to
the transceivers.

Verify that the power switch is ON and that the
power cord is connected to the proper voltage
source. Check the line fuse (refer to Note 1 at
the end of this table).

Note whether the fan is running. The fan operates on +12 V and indicates that part of the
+12 V section of the power supply is
functioning.

Press the self-test button. All LEDs should
light while the button is pressed. If all LEDs
(with the exception of the 12V LED) turn ON,
the 12V LED is defective. Rep/ace the logic
module.

If the above procedures do not correct the problem, replace the power supply.

DEREP-41

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

CD (A)

Carrier
Detect A

Should
Flicker

LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)

Indications/Corrective Action
This (green) LED flickers when data packets are
received from side B AND transmitted to side A. During heavy network traffic, this LED may appear to be
steadily lit.
When continuously OFF, this may indicate that:
•

There is no traffic on side B.

•

The transceiver on side B is not functioning.

•

The carrier detect circuit on side B is not
functioning.

•

The carrier A LED is not functioning.

Check other indicators (FUSE A. FUSE B. 5V.
and 12V LEDs) to determine that the repeater
is properly powered and whether the transceiver
is getting power.

Press the self-test button. All LEDs should
light while the button is pressed. If the Carrier
A LED fails to turn ON. the LED is defective.
Replace the logic module. If the LE,P lights.
note the results of the self-test.

For local repeaters. interchange transceiver
cable inputs.
a.

Try swapping transceiver cable inputs to
see if the inactive indications shift to side
B of the repeater (refer to Note 2 at the
end of this table).

If the indication does shift to the other
side of the repeater, suspect inactivity on
that segment, or a problem with the
transceiver and/or transceiver cable.

If the indication stays with side A. check
FUSE B. If FUSE B is good, change the
logic module.

DEREP-42

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3

LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)

Indications/Corrective Action
4.

For remote repeaters, try using a different
transceiver or transceiver cable (refer to Note 2
at the end of this table).
a.

If the CD indication improves, suspect a
problem in the transceiver or transceiver
cable.

If the CD indication does not improve,
suspect inactivity (no traffic) on side B or
a faulty logic module.

CD (8)

Carrier
Detect B

Should
Flicker

Similar to CD (A)

CPT
Error
A

Collision
Presence
Test Error
(Side A)

OFF

This (red) LED latches ON to indicate that a CPT signal was not detected on side A following a previous
data transmission to side A. The CPT signal is sent
from the transceiver via the collision pair to indicate
that the collision detect circuitry is functional.
The absence of CPT suggests:
•

A malfunction in the collision detect circuitry.

•

A malfunction in the transceiver or transceiver
cable.

•

Excessive transceiver cable length (over 50 m
[164 ft]).

Press the self-test button to reset the error indication. Note that CPT detect is turned OFF
during self-test. Monitor the LED for reoccurrence of CPT error.

For local repeaters, interchange transceiver
cable inputs.
a.

Try swapping transceiver cable inputs to
see if the CPT error indication shifts to
side B of the repeater (refer to Note 2 at
the end of this table).

If the indication does shift to the other
side of the repeater, suspect a problem
with the transceiver and/or transceiver
cable.

DEREP-43

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3

LED
Name

LED
Definition

LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)

Normal
State

Indications/Corrective Action
c.

CPT
Error
B

Collision
Presence
Test Error
(Side B)

OFF

If the indication stays with side A, suspect a problem in the CPT detect circuitry. Replace the logic module.

For remote repeaters, try using a different
transceiver or transceiver cable (refer to Note 2
at the end of this table).
a.

If the CPT error indication goes away,
suspect a problem in the transceiver or
transceiver cable.

If the CPT error indication remains, suspect inactivity (no traffic) on side B or a
faulty logic module.

For local repeaters this indication is similar to CPT
Error A.
For remote repeaters, the CPT circuit on side B is
disabled.

FLT

Fault

OFF

When ON, this (red) LED indicates that one of the
transceivers and its associated coaxial segments is currently segmented or faulty (refer to Note 3 at the end
of this table).

Observe the SEC A and SEC B LEDs. At least
one of these should be latched ON to indicate
which side is segmented.

Be aware that the conditions which resulted in
segmentation could cease to exist appearing
possibly as an intermittent malfunction.

Run the self-test and note the results.

For local repeaters only, interchange transceiver
cable inputs (refer to Note 2 at the end of this
table).
a.

DEREP-44

Swap transceiver cable inputs to see if the
segmented indication shifts to side B of
the repeater.

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 3
LED
Name

Act

LED
Definition

Standby
Active

LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)

Normal
State

OFF

Indications/Corrective Action
b.

If the indication does shift to the other
side of the repeater, suspect a problem
outside the repeater such as a transceiver,
transceiver cable, or coaxial segment.

If the indication stays with side A, suspect a problem in the collision detect circuitry. Replace the logic module.

When ON, this (red) LED indicates that the repeater
is in the active standby mode. The standby mode
becomes active when the primary repeater has failed or
when no primary repeater exists.

Check the LEDs on the rear of the primary repeater.
Follow the suggested corrective procedures.

SEG
(A)

Segmented A

OFF

This (yellow) LED indicates that side A was segmented at least once since the last self-test or power-up
was performed (refer to Note 3 at the end of this
table).

Note whether side A is currently segmented (the
FLT LED would be ON). Press the self-test
button to reset the segmented LEDs and· to run
the self-test. Note the self-test results.
.

For local repeaters, try interchanging transceiver cable inputs:

Swap transceiver cable inputs to see if the
segmented indication shifts to side B of
the repeater (refer to Note 2 at the end of
this table).

If the indication does shift to the other
side of the repeater, suspect a problem
outside the repeater such as a transceiver,
transceiver cable, or coaxial segment.

If the indication stays with side A, suspect a problem in the collision detect cir.
cuitry. Replace the logic module.

DEREP-45

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3 LEDs and Troubleshooting (Cont)
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

Indications/Corrective Action
3.

For remote repeaters:
a.

If side A is not currently segmented (the
FLT LED is OFF), press the self-test button to reset the SEC LED and to run the
self-test. Note the self-test results.

If side A is currently segmented (the FLT
LED is ON), try using a different transceiver or transceiver cable (refer to Note 2
at the end of this table).
If the segmented condition ends, suspect a
faulty transceiver or transceiver cable.
If the condition persists, suspect the coaxial cable or its associated equipment.

SEG

Segmented B

OFF

Similar to SEG (A)

(B)

NOTES
Turn OFF the repeater and unplug the power
cord before checking the line fuse.

Turn the repeater OFF before unplugging any
cables.

Segmentation is an unusual condition resulting
from loss of data loopback or from 64 consecutive unsuccessful attempts to transmit a packet.
If the A or B segmented indicator is frequently
found "ON", it may indicate intermittent
problems on the coaxial segment or its associated equipment.

DEREP-46

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 4 Self-Test Error LEDs
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

TST

Self-Test
Executing

OFF

Indications/ Corrective Action
This (red) LED lights briefly (typically .3 seconds) on
power-up and on pressing the "TST" (self-test) button.
This indicates that the repeater self-test is executing.
If the "TST" LED remains lit, the self-test has failed
(the repeater never exits self-test).
I.

INT

Internal
Self-Test

OFF

A remote repeater unit which is failing self-test
(the 'TST" LED is ON) causes the remaining
unit to fail (external) self-test. This problem
can be minimized by resetting both units.

Turn each unit OFF for five seconds and
then back ON.

Observe the LEDs at this point.

Run self-test on the "good" unit to verify
its operation.

Note the condition of the other self-test LEDs
(jor both local and remote repeaters):
a.

"INT" (internal self-test)

"ERR" (self-test error A)

"ERR" (self-test error B)

When ON, this (red) LED indicates that the repeater
is in the internal self-test state. If a data error is found
during internal or external self-test, the repeater locks
itself into the internal self-test state. This state is maintained until the repeater is reset (turned OFF for five
seconds and then turned back ON).
1.

Turn the repeater OFF, wait five seconds, and
turn the repeater ON. Only the internal test is
performed on power-up (the internal test executes with or without transceiver cables and/or
fiber-optic cables being connected).

If the "INT" LED still remains lit, a malfunction exists in the logic module.

DEREP-47

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 4 Self-Test Error LEDs (Coot)

LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

Indications/Corrective Action
3.

ERR
(A)

Self-Test
Error A

OFF

If the "INT" LED does not remain lit after
power-up, press and release the "TST" button.
The transceiver cable and/or fiber-optic cable
must be connected (for remote repeaters both
units must be ON). This runs both the internal
and external self-test. Note the conditions of
the "ERR" LEDs for the A and B sides.

This (red) LED lights when the self-test has detected
an internal or external data loopback error on side A.
If the ERR (A) LED remains ON after the internal
test, a malfunction exists in the logic module of the
repeater.
If this LED remains ON after the external self-test
only, a malfunction may exist in:

•

The transceiver cable interface.

•

The transceiver cable.

•

The transceiver connected to side A.

•

The coaxial segment on side A.

For local repeaters:
a.

Try swapping transceiver cable inputs to
see if the error indication shifts to side B
of the repeater. Refer to the note at the
end of this table.

If the indication does shift to side B, suspect a problem outside the repeater. Typically, such a problem might be the
transceiver, transceiver cable, or other
equipment on the associated coaxial
segment.

If the problem remains on side A after
swapping transceiver cable inputs, the logic module should be changed.

DEREP-48

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 4 Self-Test Error LEOs (Cont)
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

Indications/Corrective Action
2.

For remote repeaters:
a.

Try using a different transceiver or transceiver cable (see the note at the end of
this table).

Turn the repeater power ON and rerun
the external self-test (press and release
the "TST" button).
If the "ERR" (A) indication goes away,
suspect a problem in the transceiver
cable, the transceiver, or associated coaxial segment.
If the "ERR" (A) indication remains,
replace the logic module.

ERR
(B)

Self·Test
Error B

OFF

This (red) LED lights when the self-test has detected
an internal or external data loopback error on side B.

For local repeaters, indications and procedures
are similar to "ERR" (A).

For remote repeaters, use the following procedures when the "ERR" (B) LED remains lit following the external self-test.
a.

DEREP-49

Turn the repeater OFF.

DEREP MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 4 Self-Test Error LEDs (Cont)
LED
Name

LED
Definition

Normal
State

IndicationsjCorrective Action
b.

Disconnect the fiber-optic cable and
install a fiber-optic turnaround connector
in its place (see the note at the end of this
table).

Press and release the "TST" button.
If the "ERR" (8) indication remains, suspect the fiber-optic interface or the logic
module.
If the "ERR" (8) indication goes away,
suspect the re.mote repeater unit or the
fiber-optic cable. Perform the self-test on
the remote unit.

CAUTION: Fiber-optic turnaround connectors cause
collisions while they are connected. AL WAYS remove a
fiber-optic turnaround connector after testing is
completed.
NOTE
Turn repeater power OFF before disconnecting any
cables. Turning the power OFF resets error
indications.
DEREP Tech TipsjFCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DEREP Ethernet repeater.
Table 5
Tech
Tip No.
TT1A

DEREP Tech TipsjFCO Index
Speed
Bulletin

Title
Configuring an Ethernet with
DEREP Repeaters

391

DEREP-50

DESNA INSTALLATION

DESNA ChannelServer

General Description
The DEC ChannelServer is a communications device that provides a hardware connection from Digital
Equipment Corporation networks to a system 370-type compatible mainframe. This connection provides a
channel for handling communications protocols between the mainframe and the-Ethernet local area network
(LAN). The DEC ChannelServer together with DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT form a hardware and software
system that enables certain Ethernet nodes to communicate with a 370-type mainframe.
The Gateway-CT handles communications by using systems network architecture (SNA) protocols.
The Gateway-CT allows large data transfers and/or high-speed interactive access through a 370-type
mainframe channel.
The DEC ChannelServer connects the mainframe channel through bus and tag cables. Multiple channel
devices can be daisy chained together with the DEC ChannelServer.
The DEC ChannelServer connects to the Ethernet LAN through a transceiver cable. DECnet/SNA
Gateway-CT software is down-line loaded to the DEC ChannelServer from a host system on the LAN.

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information about the DEC ChannelServer.

)
/

•
•
•
•
•
•

DEC ChannelServer Hardware Installation Guide

EK-INDEC-CS

DEC ChannelServer Troubleshooting Guide

EK-DECCS-SG

DEC ChannelServer Identification Card

EK-DECCS-IC

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Guide to IBM Parameters

AA-LU36A-TK

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Installation Guide

AA-MA07 A-TE

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Problem Determination Guide

AA-LU37A-TK

Hardware Components
DEC ChannelServer is based on the MicroVAX II hardware with additional components to interface to the
mainframe and an Ethernet LAN. The components are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

42-inch cabinet
Power controller
BA23 enclosure
I/O bulkhead
KA630-AA CPU
MS630-BB memory module
Bus grant continuity card
RQDX3 diskette drive
DELQA Ethernet controller
Channel interface module set
System control panel on the front of the system
CPU control panel on the I/O bulkhead
Q22-bus backplane.

DESNA-l

DESNA INSTALLATION
The channel interface module set consists of three quad-height Q-bus modules. The modules provide the
interface between the driver/receiver module and the Q-bus. The modules contain a microsequencer and
firmware that allow automatic responses to channel signals.
The driver/receiver module provides the interface from a mainframe I/O interface channel through four
connectors (Figure 1):
•
•
•
•

BUSIN
BUS OUT
TAGIN
TAG OUT.

DEC ChannelServer Software
The DEC ChannelServer runs DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT software, which is down-line loaded from a host
system on the Ethernet LAN.
System Placement
Place the DEC ChannelServer as follows:
•

Allow 10 cm (4 inch) clearance on all sides of the cabinet to allow air circulation through the
equipment.

•

Allow enough space for maintenance access to the front and rear of the system.

•

Ensure that the floor supports a unit of approximately 158 kg (340 lbs).

•

Install the system where it will not get bumped.

•

Position the system so that it does not block or restrict access to a fire exit or safety equipment.

•

Ensure that the cables to the system do not trail where people walk.

Environmental Requirements
Table 1 lists the environmental specifications of the DEC ChannelServer.
Table 1

System Environmental Specifications

Parameter

Operating

Nonoperating

Temperature

15 to 32°C
(59 to 90°F)

-40 to 66°C
(-40 to 151°F)

Humidity

20 to 80%

Up to 95%

Altitude

2440 m (8000 ft)

Up to 4900 m (16000 ft)

The DEC ChannelServer operates with maximum wet-bulb temperature of 25°C (77°F) and a,minimum
dew point of 2°C (36°F).

DESNA-2

DESNA INSTALLATION

""'I
('

Physical Specifications
Table 2 lists the physical specifications of the DEC ChannelServer.
Table 2

Physical Specifications

Parameter

Dimension

Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:

1.06 m (42 inches)
58 cm (23.0 inches)
91 cm (36.0 inches)
Approximately 79 kg (200 lbs) .

Power Requirements
Table 3 lists the power requirements for the DEC ChannelServer.

Table 3

)

Power Requirements

Parameter

120 Vac

240 Vac

Voltage
Power source phasing
Frequency
Line frequency tolerance
Steady state current (typical)
Steady state current (maximum)
Power consumption (maximum)

88 to 128 Vac
Single
60 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
4.4 A
6.0 A
345 W

176 to 256 Vac
Single
50 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
2.2 A
3.0 A
345 W

DESNA-3

DESNA INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

(

UNPACK THE DEC
ChannelServer
HARDWARE

FILL OUT THE DEC
ChannelServer
10 CARD

INSTALL THE
APPROPRIATE
LANGUAGE LABELS
FOR THE SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL

ENSURE THAT ALL
SWITCHES ON THE
CONTROL PANEL
ARE OUT

REMOVE THE REAR
DOOR AND PLACE IT
TO THE LEFT OF
THE CABINET WITH
THE GND CABLE
ATTACHED

Figure 1

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DESNA-4

DESNA INSTALLATION

INSTALL A VT1 00-,
VT200-, OR VT300SERIES CONSOLE
TERMINAL

SELECT THE SWITCH
SETTINGS ON THE 1/0
BULKHEAD. SEE FIGURE
2 AND TABLES 4 & 5

REMOVE THE PROTECT
CARD FROM THE RX33
DISKETTE DRIVE

VERIFY THAT THE
POWER SWITCH ON THE
PANEL IS OFF

VERIFY THAT THE
POWER CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
IS OFF

Figure 1

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DESNA-5

DESNA INSTALLATION

VERIFY THAT THE
MONITOR LIGHT ON THE
POWER CONTROLLER
IS ON

PLACE THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER SWITCH TO
THE ON POSITION

SET THE BAUD RATE
ON THE CONSOLE
TERMINAL TO
9600 BAUD

TURN OFF THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER AND UNPLUG
THE MAIN POWER CORD
IMMEDIATELY. GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DESNA-6

DESNA INSTALLATION

YES

ENTER THE NUMBER
FOR THE LANGUAGE
CHOICE AND PRESS
RETURN TO START
THE TESTS

)
NO

TURN THE MODE SW
TO THE RUN MODE
(-+)

STOP

Figure 1

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DESNA-7

DESNA INSTALLATION

HALT
ENABLEIDISABLE
SWITCH

~
~.
•

ENABLE

I DISABLE

LED
j

DISPLAY

[dRUNMODE
(NORMAL
~OPERATION)

~LANGUAGE
INQUIRY MODE

MODESWITCH~~(I)~TESTMODE

BAUD SWITCH

300

600

1200
2400

• •
• :

4800
9600
19200
38400

•

CONNECTOR
FOR CONSOLE
TERMINAL

LKG-2116-88

Figure 2

Table 4

Switch Locations

Halt Enable/Disable Switch (Two-Position Toggle)

Switch Position

Function

Dot inside a circle (Up)

Halt Enable; on power-up or restart, the system enters Console I/O Mode at
the completion of self-tests.

Dot outside a circle
(down)

Halt Disable (factory setting); on power-up or restart, the system attempts
to load software from one of the boot devices at the completion of internal
self-tests.

Table 5

Mode Switch (Three-Position Rotary)

Switch Position

Mode

Arrow

Run (factory setting); if the console terminal supports Multinational Character Sets (MCS), you are prompted for language on power-up and restart only
if the battery backup has failed. Full start-up diagnostics are run.

Human profile

Language Inquiry; if the console terminal supports Multinational Character
Sets (MCS), you are prompted for language on every power-up and restart.
Full start-up diagnostics are run.

T in a circle

Test ROM programs run wraparound serial line unit tests (manufacturing
use only).

DESNA-8

DESNA CABLING

I/O Bulkhead
The DEC ChannelServer rear I/O panel provides the points of interconnection for all external cables to the
system. The points of interconnection are:
•

Console terminator connector: Requires a BCCOS terminal cable for connection to the console
terminal

•

DELQA Ethernet connector: Provides the connection to an Ethernet transceiver. BNE3H,
BNE3L, or BNE3M cables can be used to connect to the Ethernet transceiver

•

TAG IN, TAG OUT, BUS IN, and BUS OUT connectors: Provide connection to a channel
device. A 40-position channel cable (IBM PIN 5353920 or compatible) is used to make these
connections.

Channel Principles
Think of the channel as the I/O bus for 370-type architecture systems. The channel connects with two
cables; each cable contains up to 24 individually shielded conductors that end in 4S-pin connectors. One cable
is the bus cable, which carries data and command bytes; the other cable is the tag cable, which carries
channel control signals.
Channel devices, including DEC ChannelServer systems, are daisy chained together on the channel. The bus
cable from the mainframe is connected to the BUS IN connector on the first channel device. The BUS OUT
connector on that device is connected to the BUS IN connector on the next device, and so on. A terminator is
installed to the BUS OUT connector on the final channel device.

)

The connectors on the cables, on the channel, and on channel devices are light or dark colors. The IN
connector on the channel or channel device is a dark color; the OUT connector is a light color. In all cases,
dissimilar colors connect.
Cabling Procedure
Before starting the cabling procedure, run the maintenance version of MDM, then verify that the DEC
ChannelServer system meets the following conditions:
•

The power is OFF during the entire cabling procedure

•

The mainframe channel bus and tag cables are installed on the channel, and the ends that connect
to the DEC ChannelServer are labeled appropriately as bus and tag.

Connect the cabling to the DEC ChannelServer as instructed in the cabling flow diagram (Figure 3).
NOTE
Be very careful when handling the connectors and bus
and tag cables. The pins in these connectors are
fragile.

DESNA-9

DESNA CABLING
Cabling Flow Diagram
IMPORTANT
IBM recommends that the CPU be halted before
disabling a channel device. Ensure that the DEC
ChannelServer is isolated before connecting the bus
and tag cables.

YES
NO

HAVE THE MAINFRAME
SYSTEM MANAGER HALT
THE MAINFRAME

DISCONNECT THE BUS
AND TAG CABLES

Figure 3

Cabling Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)

DESNA-IO

DESNA CABLING

CONNECT THE BUS
CABLE FROM THE
CHANNEL DEVICE TO
THE BUS OUT
CONNECTOR

CONNECT THE BUS
TERMINATOR TO THE
BUS OUT
CONNECTOR

CONNECT THE BUS
CABLE FROM THE
MAINFRAME OR
CHANNEL DEVICE TO
THE BUS IN
CONNECTOR

)

CONNECT THE TAG
TERMINATOR TO THE
TAG. OUT CONNECTOR
CONNECT THE TAG
CABLE TO THE TAG
OUT CONNECTOR

Figure 3

Cabling Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

DESNA-l1

DESNA CABLING

CONNECT THE TAG
CABLE FROM THE
MAINFRAME OR
CHANNEL DEVICE TO
THE TAG IN
CONNECTOR

SET CHANNEL
ENABLE/DISABLE TO
THE CHANNEL ENABLE
POSITION

ATTACH THE LAN
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
TO THE DEC
ChannelServer

GO TO "RUNNING
DESNX DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS"

Figure 3

Cabling Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

DESNA-12

DESNA DIAGNOSTICS

tl-

Diagnostics
There are two types of diagnostics available with the DEC ChannelServer:
•
•

DESNX
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM).

The DESNX diagnostic tests are used to verify proper communication between the 370-type mainframe and
the ChannelServer.
The MOM diagnostic tests are designed to isolate and identify faults in the system to the defective FRU.

Running DESNX Diagnostic Tests - To verify communication between the 370-type mainframe and the
DEC ChannelServer, perform the following.

)

Have the system manager provide access to a mainframe system console.

Verify that the CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE switch is set to ENABLE.

Verify that the HALT ENABLE/DISABLE switch is set to DISABLE.

Verify that the mainframe is using the MVS, VM or VSE/SP operating system.

Verify that the DEC ChannelServer system is defined as a channel-attached 3174 control unit to
the mainframe operating system and to VTAM. See the DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Guide to
IBM Parameters.

Find out the channel device address allocated by the mainframe to the DEC ChannelServer
system.

Write this channel device address on DEC ChannelServer identification card.

Determine the names that VTAM gives to the major node and physical unit assigned to the DEC
ChannelServer system. Write this information on the DEC ChannelServer identification card.

Power up the DEC ChannelServer and insert the DESNX diagnostic disk into the disk drive.

10.

Verify that the hardware switch settings for address and vector match those displayed on the
console.

11.

When DESNX asks for the 3-digit device address allocated to it on the channel, enter the address
and press RETURN. Verify the address with a Y or N, and re-enter as required.

DESNA-13

DESNA DIAGNOSTICS

12.

When the address is verified correct, DESNX begins the tests. When the console displays the
"Received sense command" message, issue the following VARY commands from the mainframe
system console.
MVS Operating System Commands
VARY nnn,ONLINE
hh.mm.ss IEE302I nnn ONLINE
VARY NET,ACT,ID=majnod,SCOPE=ALL
hh.mm.ss IST093I majnod ACTIVE
hh.mm.ss IST093I puname ACTIVE
VM Operating System Commands
VARY nnn,ONLINE
nnn VARIED ONLINE
ATTACH nnn VTAM
CTLR nnn ATTACH TO VTAM
VARY NET,ACT,ID=majnod,SCOPE=ALL
*IST093I majnod NODE NOW ACTIVE
*IST093I puname NODE NOW ACTIVE
NOTE
The VARY NET commands used in a VSEjSP operating system are the same commands used in the
MVS and VM operating systems; however, the
VSEjSP operating system responses are different.
Replace nnn in the VARY commands by the appropriate hexadecimal device address. Replace
majnod by the name of the VTAM major node for the DEC ChannelServer. The lines beginning
with hh.mm.ss represent time-stamped output from the mainframe. There are other output
messages that are not time-stamped.
After the link has been connected, DESNX expects VTAM to send it SNA requests to activate
the physical unit and logical units that are associated with the control unit. DESNX displays the
following sequence of messages when the link is connected:
Datalink disconnected
Datalink connected
Physical Unit activated
Logical Unit(s) activated
NOTE
The "Datalink disconnected" message might not
appear on the console.

13.

When the "Test complete" message is displayed, the test procedure has been successfully
completed.

DESNA-14

DESNA DIAGNOSTICS

14.

Issue the following commands from the mainframe system console to deactivate the DEC
ChannelServer.
MVS Operating System Commands
VAR Y NET,INACT,ID=majnod
hh.mm.ss ISTI05I puname NODE NOW INACTIVE
hh.mm.ss ISTI05I majnod NODE NOW INACTIVE
VAR Y nnn,OFFLINE
hh.mm.ss IEE794I nnn PENDING OFFLINE
VM Operating System Commands
VARY NET,INACT,ID=majnod
ISTI05I puname NODE NOW INACTIVE
ISTI05I majnod NODE NOW INACTIVE
DETACH nnn VTAM
CTLR nnn DETACHED VTAM nnn
VARY OFFLINE nnn
nnn VARIED OFFLINE
If the DEC ChannelServer passes DESNX, do the following.

15.

)

Dress cables to the center of the DEC ChannelServer cabinet.

Verify that the HALT/ENABLE switch is set to the DISABLE position.

Verify that the MODE switch is in the RUN MODE position.

Close the rear bulkhead door.

Running MDM Diagnostic Tests - To run MDM diagnostics, do the following.
1.

Notify the mainframe system manager to disable the ChannelServer from the channel.

When the Channel Active LED is off, set the CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE switch to the
DISABLE (down) position.

Verify tha.t the console terminal is connected to the ChannelServer.

Load the MDM diagnostics.

If a particular FRU is suspect, select option 4. If no particular FRU is suspect, select option 1.

If the Ethernet module is suspect, install the loopback connector to the transceiver end of the
transceiver cable and run the appropriate tests. If the test fails, move the IOQpback connector to
the I/O bulkhead connector and test again. This isolates the problem to the cable or controller /internal cable.

DESNA-15

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Fault Isolation Tools
The following tools are available to help in isolating faults in the DEC ChannelServer system.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

MicroVAX status LED
MicroVAX diagnostic monitor (MDM)
DESNX diagnostic tests
Network control program (NCP)
Systems network architecture NCP (SNANCP)
Event logging
IBM system and log recordings

MicroVAX Status LED - Indicates self-test status on power-up/reset or during auto reboot.
MDM Maintenance Version - Diagnostic tests designed to isolate and identify faults in the system to the
defective FRU.
DESNX Diagnostic Tests - Tests used to verify proper communication between the 370-type mainframe
and the ChannelServer.
NCP - Used to control and show the status of the DECnet side of the network. The following two commands
are the most useful in a DEC ChannelServer environment.
•

SHOW COMMAND - Use the SHOW NODE Gateway nodename.

•

LOOP COMMANDS - Use the following coIVmands.
LOOP CIRCUIT QNA-O PHYSICAL ADDRESS Physical Address
LOOP NODE Gateway nodename

SNANCP - Used to control and show the status of the SNA side of the network. The following commands
are the most useful.
•

USE COMMAND - Use the USE SYSTEM Gateway nodename command to define which
gateway will be used.

•

SHOW COMMANDS SHOW LINE CQ-O COUNTERS shows the following errors.
Process Errors: Indicates either a device driver or hardware errors.
Channel Errors: The two categories of channel errors are listed below:
Invalid Command Byte - Indicates the following:
An incorrect IBM parameter
Incorrect software configuration
Hardware error in channel interface, channel, or channel cables.
Command Byte Parity Error - Indicates that a hardware error caused a command byte to
have incorrect parity.
SHOW CIRCUIT CHAN-O COUNTERS shows process errors that indicate channel
protocol errors.

DESNA-16

(

: DESNA MAINTENANCE· AIDS

•

SET COMMANDS - The following SET commands are useful during a troubleshooting session
with SNANCP.
SET PU SNA-O STATE (ON/OFF)
SET PU SNA-l STATE (ON/OFF)
SET CIRCUIT CHAN-O STATE (ON/OFF)
SET LINE CQ-O STATE (ON/OFF)

Event Logging - This is an IBM tool that provides a detailed history of hardware and software problems.
IBM System and Log Recordings - This is an IBM tool that provides a history of all console messages.
Troubleshooting
This section is divided into two main areas:
•
•

General troubleshooting
Troubleshooting DESNX problems.

General Troubleshooting
This section contains steps that can be helpful in isolating the problem to a general area.
1.

Obtain a problem statement that includes the number of users affected, and how the IBM
system/channel and adjacent controllers are affected.

Review the event log to understand the history of hardware or software problems.

Consult the IBM system operator to determine what hardware and software errors have
occurred/been recorded and what console messages have been displayed.

Check the DESNA status LED. If it is cycling through the self-test, it indicates that a hardware
fault has occurred. If this is the case, use SNANCP to:
SET PU STATES OFF
SET CIRCUIT STATE(S) OFF
SET LINE STATE OFF
a.

Ask the IBM operator to:
VARY LOCAL SNA MAJOR NODE INACTIVE
VARY DEVICE OFFLINE
Set CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE switch to DISABLE

Halt the gateway by doing the following:
1)

Place the HALT ENABLE/DISABLE switch to ENABLE.

Perform a power-on reset to start the self-test. Self-test should find the failing module.

DESNA-17

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
5.

Verify communication between the load host and the gateway by using NCP as follows.
ncp> LOOP CIRCUIT
ncp> LOOP NODE

If communications cannot be established, try communicating between another host and
the gateway.

If one works and the other does not, check the appropriate Ethernet connection.

Verify line and circuits on the IBM channel by using SNANCP as follows.
snancp> USE SYSTEM Gateway-nodename
snancp> SHOW LINE CQ-O
a.

If the line state is OFF, set it to ON.
snancp> SHOW LINE line-id COUNTERS

b.
7.

If channel errors are indicated, run MDM and DESNX

If the gateway cannot be accessed by SNANCP:
a.

Reboot the gateway.

If unsuccessful, run MDM.

Troubleshooting DESNX Problems
If DESNX does not proceed as expected, the following procedure may help to determine the problem.
1.

Check the channel cables for damage and loose connections.

Verify the operation of other devices on the channel. If the other devices are functioning properly,
the cable and mainframe are probably functional.

Run the MDM diagnostic tests to verify the basic integrity of the channel interface module set.

If DESNX displays the following message on the console,
"- Warning- channel not operational"
possible causes are:
1.

Problem with bus or tag cables - Verify that the bus and tag cables are connected and seated
properly, and that there are no bent pins

The driver/receiver or channel interface module is defective

The channel or mainframe is not functioning.

DESNA-18

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

If DESNX displays the follow message on the console,
"-Warning- asynch status still pending in driver"
possible causes are:
1.

Problem with bus or tag cables - Verify that the bus and tag cables are connected and seated
properly, and that there are no bent pins

The driver/receiver or channel interface module is defective

The channel or mainframe is not functioning.

If DESNX displays the follow message on the console,
"-Warning- enable/disable switch is set to disable"
toggle the switch to the CHANNEL ENABLE position and wait 30 seconds for DESNX to retry the
operation.

If DESNX displays the following message on the console,
"-Warning- channel reset (system or selective)"
"-Warning- selective reset received on channel"
this indicates that an unassigned channel address was used for the DEC ChannelServer. Verify the address.
)

If the DEC ChannelServer never receives a SENSE command and no error is indicated, possible causes are:
1.

Problem with bus or tag cables - Verify that the bus and tag cables are connected and seated
properly, and that there are no bent pins

The driver/receiver or channel interface module is defective

The channel or mainframe may not be configured correctly.

If the "attempting to contact channel" message is displayed every 30 seconds and the SENSE command is
received in reply, however, the "datalink connected" message is never seen and no errors are indicated, the
problem is:
The operating system resources are not active.
Ensure that the VARY-ONLINE and VARY-ACTIVE commands were issued correctly.

If the "datalink connection" message is received but no "physical unit activated" message is displayed:
Attempt the previous recovery procedure for no "datalink connected" message.

If the "physical unit activation" message is received but no "logical unit activated" message is displayed:
Attempt the recovery procedure for no "datalink connected" message.

DESNA-19

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

If one of the following messages is received,
"-Error- Command byte parity error"
"-Error- I/O error: parity error on channel"
possible causes are:
1.
2.
3.

A malfunctioning driver/receiver
A malfunctioning interface module
A faulty cable.

If the following message is displayed,
"-Error- Invalid channel command"
possible cause is:
The DEC ChannelServer is not configured in the mainframe as a 3174 controller.
If the following message is displayed,
"System bugcheck, code nnnnnnnn"
Most likely a timing problem exists; reload and run DESNX again.

DESNA-20

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Replacing Faulty FRUs
The FRUs for the DEC ChannelServer are:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Central processing unit (KA630)
Memory module (MS630)
Bus grant module
Ethernet module (DELQA)
Diskette controller module (RQDX3)
Channel interface module set (three modules)
Channel interface module set connector blocks
Driver/receiver module
Console serial line unit
Power controller
Diskette controller cable
Power supply
Power supply rear fan
Power supply front fan
Control panel
Q22-bus backplane
Appropriate cables.

Preparation
Before replacing any FRU, do the following.

)

NOTE
When replacing any FRU, verify that the cables
attached to the FRU are not loose or damaged.
1.

Notify the system manager of the mainframe to disable the DEC ChannelServer from
the channel.
NOTE
Q-bus modules can be replaced without taking the
IBM system down, however, care must be taken not
to short pins on the driver/receiver module while the
channel is active. To do so could result in the IBM
system going down. Check with the IBM system
manager before proceeding.

Consult the system manager to determine if the customer wishes to disable the whole channel. If
not, perform the following.
snancp> SET PU STATE OFF
snancp> SET CIRCUIT STATE OFF
snancp> SET LINE STATE OFF
The channel is not disrupted under normal maintenance procedures except when the bus or tag
cables are disconnected.

DESNA-21

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
3.

Remove the rear bulkhead door, being careful of the ground strap. Leave the ground
strap connected.

HEX SCREWS

111\111111111

1IIIII\IIIIn
1111111111111

1111111111111
111111111111\
1111111111111

11111\111\11\
111111\111111

II1111UlUII

111111111111111 11 "
1111111111'"
11111111
11111111,

IIl11l11h
1111111111

111111'

II"

1111111111111
11111111\1111

111\1'
1\1'

LKG-2117-8B

DESNA-22

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
\

Set the CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE switch to the DISABLE (down) position.

At the front of the cabinet, set the power switch to OFE

At the rear of the cabinet, set the circuit breaker on the power controller to the OFF
(down) position.

~----~ CHANNEL

ENABLE/ DISABLE
SWITCH

)

LKG-2131-B8

DESNA-23

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Remove the system ac cord from the ac outlet.
WARNING
Remove the system ac cord from the ac outlet to
prevent bodily injury during any FRU replacement
procedure.

Loosen the two captive screws on the I/O bulkhead, and lower the bulkhead.

LKG-2118-88

Remove the two cables from the left side of the CPU module and label them.

10.

Proceed to the appropriate FRU replacement procedure.

DESNA-24

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DELQA Module Replacement

Perform the "Preparation" procedure (if not already done).

Locate the bus position of the DELQA module.

BUS
GRANT

CHANNEL
INTERFACE
MODULES
LKG-2126-88

)

Remove the two cables from the left side of the CPU module and label them.

Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the DELQA module.

Remove the two plastic board separators.

Pull the module straight out of the connector and out of the system.

Install the replacement module by inserting it into the correct bus slot.

Verify that the switch has poles 1, 2, 3, and 5 open, and pole 4 closed.

Slide the module into the bus connector, and push it into the slot until it is firmly seated.

10.

Proceed to "Completing the FRU Replacement Procedure" to finish the replacement procedure.

DESNA-25

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Channel Interface Module Set Replacement Procedure
The channel interface module set consists of three modules and two connector blocks. The modules are
considered one FRU and the connector blocks are another FRU.
Follow the procedure below to replace the module set and the connector blocks.

Perform the preparation (if not already done).

Remove the cable from the diskette controller and label it.

Remove the cable from the Ethernet DELQA module.

Remove the 50-pin connector block (left side) from the module set.

Remove the 40-pin connector block (right side) from the module set.

Check the connector blocks for damage.

Remove the left plastic board separator that is clipped onto the channel interface module.

LEFT PLASTIC
BOARD SEPARATOR
MIDDLE PLASTIC
BOARD SEPARATOR

W
8900-1
8900-2
~+!-+iI-t-"""it-- 8900-3

\0
~~-- RED STRIPE

LKG-2181-88

DESNA-26

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Pull the top module (8900-1) out of the bus connector and out of the system.

With the cable still connected, pull the second module out of the bus connector.

10.

Disconnect the cable and label it.

11.

With the cable still connected, pull the bottom module (8900-3) out of the bus connector.

12.

Disconnect the cable and label it.

13.

Verify that the switches on the second board of the replacement set match those in Table 6.

Table 6

Switch 1

Switch 2

OFF

Pole No.

1
)

Channel Interface Module Switch Locations

14.

Install the replacement module set by connecting the bus ribbon cable to the 8900-3 module and
installing it into the next-to-bottom bus slot. (The bottom slot always remains empty.)

15.

Connect the ribbon cable to the 8900-2 module and install it into the slot just above the
8900-3 module.

16.

Install the 8900-1 module into the slot just above the 8900-2 module.

17.

Replace the left plastic board separator and clip it onto the channel interface module.

18.

Inspect the connector blocks and reinstall them if they are not damaged. If the blocks are
damaged, replace them with new ones.

19.

Reconnect the cables that were removed from other modules and go to "Completing the FRU
Replacement Procedure."

'\
J

DESNA-27

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DriverJReceiver Module Replacement Procedure
1.

Perform the "Preparation" procedure.

Notify the system manager of the mainframe that the channel cables must be disconnected from
the DEC ChannelServer, causing a temporary disruption in the channel.
NOTE
There are two possible ways that channel cables may
be connected to the DEC ChannelServer.
1.

Hosts connected to the gateway by a T-BAR or
MATRIX switch

Host connected directly to the gateway.

If the hosts are connected by a switch, have the IBM
operator stop the IBM system and disable the unit leg
(ensuring that all devices are off-line).

Locate the BUS IN, BUS OUT, TAG IN, and TAG OUT cables connected to the DEC
ChannelServer and label them (if they are not already labeled).

Remove the cables from the BUS IN and BUS OUT connectors. (A terminator instead of a cable
might be connected to the BUS OUT connector.)

If a replacement driver/receiver module is present, proceed to the next step. If a replacement
driver/receiver is not present, connect the BUS IN and BUS OUT cables together.

Remove the cables from the TAG IN and TAG OUT connectors. (A terminator instead of a cable
might be connected to the TAG OUT connector.)

If a replacement driver/receiver module is present, proceed to the next step; if not, connect the
TAG IN and TAG OUT cables together.

Loosen the two captive screws on the I/O bulkhead, and lower the bulkhead.

Disconnect the cables from the driver/receiver module and label them.

DESNA-28

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

1\",

)
LKG-2137-88

10.

Determine the position of the toggle switch on the module (OUT or IN). The replacement module
must be set to the same position.

11.

At the front of the I/O bulkhead, remove the eight screws that hold the driver/receiver module
in place.

12.

Remove the module.

13.

Remove the plastic shield from the module by pressing in the tab on each of the three
snap-in spacers.

14.

Install the spacers and shield onto the replacement module.

15.

Install the replacement module, ensuring that the LED and CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE
switch go through their respective slots in the bulkhead.

16.

Secure the module with the eight screws.

DESNA-29

DESNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

17.

Verify that the toggle switch on the module is in the same position as the removed module.

18.

Reverse steps 1 through 9.
NOTE
Incorrectly installing the bus and tag cables could
cause the diagnostics not to load, or cause MDM to
fail when testing the channel interface.

19.

Proceed to "Completing the FRU Replacement Procedure."

Completing the FRU Replacement Procedure
After replacing any FRU in the DEC ChannelServer, perform the following.

Install the system ac cord to the ac outlet.

Raise the I/O bulkhead and tighten the two captive screws.

Set the circuit breaker on the power controller to the ON (up) position.

At the front of the cabinet, set the power switch ON.

Run diagnostics to verify that the original system fault has been corrected.

Set the CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE switch to the ENABLE (up) position.

Notify the mainframe system manager to enable the DEC ChannelServer on the channel.

Run DESNX diagnostics to verify the system.

Install the rear bulkhead door to the cabinet.

10.

Notify the system manager that the DEC ChannelServer is repaired.

DESNA-30

DESNC INSTALLATION
DESNC ETHERNET CONTROLLER

General Description
The DESNC (DIGITAL Ethernet Security Network Controller) is an encryption device that allows secure
operations on an Ethernet network. The DESNC encrypts data from a source node.and forwards the data to
a destination DESNC which decrypts the data and sends it to the destination node. This process allows
secure data transfers and prevents other nodes on the network from reading the data.
There are two ways of using the DESNC controller:
•

A DESNC controller with an attached node running the VAX KDC (Key Distribution Center)
software is used as the primary controller. This controller manages the other DESNC controllers
on the user nodes. A VAX KDC DESNC must be installed on each Ethernet Local Area
Network (LAN).

•

A DESNC controller, with attached nodes that are not running the VAX KDC software, is used
to encrypt and decrypt data and is managed by a VAX KDC DESNC.

The DESNC controller is installed between the user nodes and the Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN)
backbone segment.
The VAX KDC software is used to manage the DESNC controllers on the network. The network security
manager uses the VAX KDC software to:
Server Functions

•

Define the conditions under which a host station with a DESNC can communicate with another
host with or without a DESNC

•

Obtain status information from a selected DESNC

Interface Functions

•

Obtain a list of DESNC errors and audit security events

•

Distribute association keys to the DESNC controllers

•

Enforce VAX KDC security policy

•

Perform maintenance

DESNC-I

DESNC INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation

DESNC Technical Description

EK-DESNC-TD

DESNC Instailation/User's Guide

EK-DESNC-UG

DESNC Maintenance Advisory Brief

EY-7678E-MB

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

VAX Key Distribution Center Installation Guide

AA-KM70A-TE

VAX Key Distribution Center Security Manager's Guide

AA-KM69A-TE

DESNC Modes of Operation

Controlled By Key Switch:
Control Mode

Enables self-test and the entering of initialization keys.

Operational Mode

Enables the encryption and decryption of data.

Controlled By Software:
Bypass Mode

Allows the DESNC controllers to operate when the VAX KDC
system is down. Controlled by software and the BYPASS switch.

Standby Mode

Does not allow data frames to be transmitted between user nodes.
Only control messages from the VAX KDC node can be transmitted to the standby DESNC. The VAX KDC uses the Standby
mode to disable the DESNC and prevent unauthorized use.

DESNC-2

DESNC INSTALLATION
~

)

DESNC Configuration Considerations
Some conditions and restrictions must be followed when connecting the DESNC controller into the LAN.
On the network side of the DESNC controller:
•

Two nodes that communicate with each other cannot have more than two DESNC controllers in
that communication path.

•

For encrypted communications there can be up to four LAN Bridge 100 bridges (DEBET) and
two DESNC controllers in the communication path between two nodes.

•

For nonencrypted communications there can be up to five LAN Bridge 100 bridges (DEBET) and
one DESNC controller between a secure node and any unsecure node with which it
communicates.

On the user node side of the DESNC controller:
•

The VAX KDC node must be connected to the Number 1 ThinWire port on the VAX KDC
DESNC controller.

•

No repeaters (DEMPR or DEREP) can be used. Only a single segment can be connected
to each port.

•

A DESNC controller can support a maximum of 20 nodes. The 20 nodes can be connected to one
port or distributed across the four ports. For maximum security, only one node should be
connected to each port.

•

Nodes connected to the same port on a DESNC controller can be daisy chained and must have a
minimum of 0.5 m (1.64 ft) of cable between nodes.

•

Connections must be radial ThinWire cable only. The maximum ThinWire cable length for each
port is 185 m (606.9 ft).

•

All user nodes on a port must go through a DESNC to reach other user nodes on other ports.

•

All user nodes must go through the DESNC to reach the network.

•

A ThinWire cable must not connect to any device that connects the ThinWire cable
shield to ground.

•

A terminator must be installed on all unused ports and at the end of a Thin Wire segment
connected to a port. (Four 50 ohm terminators are provided with each DESNC controller.)

•

Any network failure on one of the ports of a DESNC controller will result in the loss of all four
ports on the DESNC controller.

General configuration considerations:
•

Nodes on a Local Area VAXcluster (LAVC) that communicate among themselves at continuous
high rates, should be connected to a single port on the DESNC if they are located together.

•

A DESNC controller can be isolated on either the network side or the user node side by a bridge
(DEBET) to provide address filtering.

DESNC-3

DESNC INSTALLATION
Power Requirements
The DESNC controller operates on ac power, 47 to 63 Hz. A voltage select switch is used to select either
120 Vac or 240 Vac operation.
The DESNC controller draws 1.5 A at 120 Vac and 0.75 A at 240 Vac.
Device Placement
The DESNC controller is a Class B device and can be installed in an open office or computer-room
environment. Typical locations might include a:
•
•
•

Shelf,
Table, or
Rack-mount assembly.
CAUTION
Do not install the DESNC controller on the
floor. Excessive dirt and dust infiltration may
damage the unit.

Installation Procedure
The following steps give the correct order for installing the hardware, installing the VAX KDC software,
configuring the security-enhanced LAN, and initializing the VAX KDC DESNC controller and the non
VAX KDC DESNC controller(s). See Figure 1 for hardware components.
1.

Install the VAX KDC software on the designated VAX KDC node. Refer to the VAX Key
Distribution Center Installation Guide for instructions.

Configure the security-enhanced Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the VAX Key Distribution Center Security Manager's Guide for instructions.

Install and test the DESNC controller to be used by the VAX KDC node. Refer to the DESNC
Installation/User's Guide for instructions.

Initialize the VAX KDC DESNC. Refer to the VAX Key Distribution Center Security Manager's Guide Chapter 4 for instructions.

Install and test the non VAX KDC DESNC controller(s). Refer to the DESNC Installation/User's Guide for instructions.

Initialize the non VAX KDC DESNC controller(s). Refer to the VAX Key Distribution Center
Security Manager's Guide for instructions.

DESNC-4

DESNC INSTALLATION

MOUNTING BRACKETS

[g]
.f

NETWORK LOOPBACK CONNECTOR

J""'"

;:'~\

SCREWS

FOUR 50-OHM
ThinWire TERMINATORS

TWO KEYS FOR FRONT
PANEL KEYSWITCH
I NSTALLATION/USER'S
GUIDE
POWER CORD
MKV88-1230

Figure 1 DESNC Hardware Components

DESNC-5

DESNCINSTALLATION
Updating the VAX KDC Database
The following procedures are for updating the VAX KDC database when a DESNC is replaced, when a node
is moved from one DESNC port to another, and when an Ethernet controller is replaced in a node attached
to the DESNC.
1.

When a faulty DESNC has been removed, the replacement must have the initialization key and
VAX KDC address installed. Use the following procedure to initialize a replacement DESNC.
Update the DESNC Ethernet address in the VAX KDC database.
$KDC
KDC>MODIFY CONTROLLER [controller name]!
ADDRESS=XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
KDC>GENERATE INITIALIZATION_KEYS [controller name]/
OUTPUT=file.ext
a.

Print the initialization key file.

Enter initialization key and VAX KDC address information for the replaced
DESNC taken from the file printed.

Check that KDC OK LED lights and return to the VAX KDC system.

Destroy the printed initialization key file.

KDC>UPDATE [controller name]
KDC>EXIT
$DELETE/ERASE [Initialization key file]
2.

When a node has been moved from one DESNC port to another DESNC port, the change has to
be noted in the VAX KDC configuration database.
Update node placement on the DESNC into the VAX KDC database.
$KDC
KDC>MODIFY NODE [node name]!CONTROLLER=[controller name]/
PORT=[port number]
KDC>EXIT

When an Ethernet controller is replaced in a node attached to the DESNC, the VAX KDC
configuration database must be changed to reflect the change in Ethernet address.
Update node Ethernet address on the VAX KDC database.
$KDC
KDC>MODIFY NODE [node name]! ADDRESS=XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
KDC>EXIT

DESNC-6

DESNC CABLING

Cabling

SLIDE LATCH

:S,~

NETWORK /
CONNECTOR

ThinWire
BNC CABLES

V
/v
I· .-,.
. ~.-

------~----------~

Ethernet
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV87·1570

Figure 2 DESNC I/O Cable Connection

DESNC-7

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

Power-Up Self-Test
Use the flowchart in Figure 3 to perform the power-up self-test.

INSTALL FOUR 50-OHM
TERMINATORS ON
USER PORTS. SEE
FIGURE 4

INSTALL
TERMINATORS ON
THE TEE CONNECTOR
OF THE DESTA UNIT

REPLACE DESNC

MKV88-1231

Figure 3 DESNC Power-Up Self-Test Flowchart

DESNC-8

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

DESNC

CONNECTOR

TERMINATORS

Ethernet
DESTA

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV88-1232

Figure 4 Power-Up Self-Test Configuration

)
DESNC-9

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

ThinWire Port Check
Use the flowchart in Figure 5 to test and verify the individual Thin Wire ports.

ThinWire TEE
CONNECTOR TO THE
DESTA. TERMINATE
ONE END OF THE TEE
CONNECTOR WITH A
50-OHM TERMINATOR

CONNECT THE
ThinWire CABLE FROM
THE OTHER END OF
THE TEE CONNECTOR
TO A USER PORT. ALL
UNUSED USER PORTS
MUST HAVE 50-OHM
TERMINATORS
INSTALLED

SET DESNC REAR
PANEL POWER
SWITCH TO ON

TURN "OPERATE/
CONTROL" SWITCH
TO "CONTROL"
POSITION

MKV88·1233

Figure 5 DESNC ThinWire Port Check Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 3)
DESNC-IO

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

ENTER TEST CODE
"'B" ON DESNC
KEYPAD, THEN PRESS
"ENTER"

REPLACE DESNC

CARRIER LED ON
MOMENTARILY.
REMOVE ThinWire
CABLE FROM USER
PORT AND TERMINATE THE PORT

CONNECT ThinWire
CABLE TO NEXT USER
PORT CONNECTOR

MKV88·1234

Figure 5 DESNC ThinWire Port Check Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 3)

DESNC-ll

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

REPLACE DESNC

PRESS THE "STEP"
BUnON ON THE
FRONT PANEL

MKV87-1584

Figure 5 DESNC ThinWire Port Check Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 3)

DESNC-12

DESNC DIAGNOSTICS

ThinWire
TERMINATORS

ThinWire
PORT

ThinWire
CABLE

DESNC
NETWORK
CONNECTOR

BNC
TEE CONNECTOR
TERMINATOR

Ethernet
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV88-1235

Figure 6 DESNC Thin Wire Port Test Configuration

DESNC-13

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

DESNC/VAX KDC Troubleshooting Flowchart

Use the flowchart in Figure 7 to troubleshoot the DESNC/VAX KDC.

INSTALL SOFTWARE

SECURITY MANAGER'S
GUIDE (AA-KM69A-TE)

SEE FIGURE 5

MKV88·1236

Figure 7 DESNC/VAX KDC Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 3)

DESNC-14

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE DESNC

THE INITIALIZATION
KEY NEEDS TO BE
INSTALLED. INSTALL
INITIALIZATION KEY
YES

DESNC DOES NOT
HAVE VALID KDC
ADDRESS INSTALLED.
INSTALL VAX KDC
Ethernet ADDRESS

MKV88·1237

Figure 7

DESNC/VAX KDC Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 3)

)
DESNC-15

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

START THE
SOFTWARE

YES

IS ACCESS
CONTROL POLICY
FOR SECURE NODES
CORRECT
- ASSIGN NODE
ADDRESSES IN KDC
DATABASE
- GET A LIST OF
NODES THAT CAN
COMMUNICATE
FROM KDC
DATABASE
- TEST NODE
HARDWARE
- UPDATE
CONFIGURATION
FILE VERSION IN
ALL KDCs

MKV88-1238

Figure 7

DESNCjVAX KDC Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 3)

DESNC-16

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

DESNC LED Indicators
The LED indicators on the front panel of the DESNC are used to indicate the status of the DESNC and the
VAX KDC software. Table 1 shows the LED indicator combinations and definitions in the Control mode.
Table 2 shows the LED indicator combinations and definitions in the Operational mode.
Table 1

DESNC LED Indicators in the Control Mode

x - NOT SIGNIFICANT
0- ON

* - BLINK
- - OFF

POWER IS TURNED ON

POWER IS ON AND SELF-TEST IS RUNNING

SELF-TEST SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED

SELF-TEST FAILED

KDC MASTER KEY IS NOT ENTERED

DESNC DOES NOT HAVE VALID
CONTROLLER INITIALIZATION KEY

ADDRESS BEING ENTERED

DESNC HAS VALID KDC ADDRESS

DESNC DOES NOT HAVE VALID KDC ADDRESS
KEY IS BEING ENTERED

KDC WENT DOWN AFTER DESNC WAS
INITIALIZED

MKV87-1593

)
DESNC-17

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

DESNC LED Indicators in the Operational Mode

Table 2

x- NOT SIGNIFICANT
0 - ON

* - BLINK
- -

OFF

POWER IS TURNED ON

DESNC IS A KDC CONTROLLER KDC
MASTER KEY IS ENTERED

DOWN-LINE LOAD IN PROCESS

DESNC HAS VALID CONTROLLER
INITIALIZATION KEY

KDC IS ON-LINE, DESNC IS OPERATIONAL

KDC IS DOWN, DESNC NOT OPERATIONAL

DESNC IS IN BYPASS MODE

x
x

BYPASS MODE REQUESTED WHEN KDC IS
DOWN, BUT KDC DID NOT AUTHORIZE BYPASS

DESNC PLACED IN STANDBY MODE BY KDC

MKV87·1576

DESNC-18

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

VAX KDC Testing
Follow the flowchart in Figure 8 to use the VAX KDC software for verifying the DESNC controllers in the
network.

INSTALL SOFTWARE

CHECK THE START-UP
COMMAND FILE FOR
PROPER
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES
YES

YES

MKV88-1239

Figure 8

VAX KDC Maintenance Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 4)

DESNC-19

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

CHECK THAT
KDC$START-UP EXISTS
ENTER:KDC$*
MOM$LOAD=KDC$LlBRARY.XX

MOM$LOAD IS
DEFINED IN SYSTEM
START-UP FILE. ADD
DEFINITIONS

SEE VAX KEY
DISTRIBUTION CENTER
SECURITY MANAGER'S
GUIDE (AA- KM69A-TE)

KDC $ CONTROLLER
PORT DEVICE
EXISTENCE
KDC $ CONTROLLER
PORT DEVICE
VALIDITY
KDC $ CONTROLLER
PORT DEVICE
PROTECTION

MKV88-1240

Figure 8 VAX KDC Maintenance Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 4)

DESNC-20

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

KDC>SHOW STATUS

CHECK LED ON NONKDC
DESNC
FOR
STATUS (KDC LINK OK)

)

CHECK FOR:
-INVALID DEDICATED
ALARM DEVICES
-INVALID DEVICE
CHARACTERISTICS
-INVALID DEVICE
PROTECTION
-ENABLED OPCOM
FACILITY

MKV88-1241

Figure 8 VAX KDC Maintenance Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 4)

DESNC-21

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

YES

CHECK ASSOCIATION
ACCESS CONTROL
POLICY. ACCESS
DATABASE OF NODES
ON THE NETWORK.
SHOW UNKNOWN (A
LIST OF NODES THAT
CAN COMMUNICATE).
CHECK USER NODES.
IS THE KDC'S SERVER
RUNNING AT KDC
NODE?

CHECK FOR:
-INVALID DEDICATED
ALARM DEVICES
-INVALID DEVICE
CHARACTERISTICS
-INVALID DEVICE
PROTECTION
-ENABLED OPCOM
FACILITY

MKV88·1242

Figure 8 VAX KDC Maintenance Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 4)

DESNC-22

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS
VAX KDC Commands and Qualifiers
Table 3 contains a listing of the VAX KDC commands and the qualifiers associated with each command.
For a description of each command, refer to Chapter 7 in the VAX Key Distribution Center Security
Manager's Guide.
Table 3 VA X KDC Commands and Qualifiers
Commands

qualifiers

ABORT controller-list

/[NO]CONFIRM
/[NO]LOG

ACCOUNTING [file-spec, ... ]

/BEFORE
/[NO]BRIEF
/BY_CONTROLLER
/BY_EVENT
/[NO]FULL
/BY-KDC
/BY_NODE
/[NO]LOG
/OUTPUT
/SINCE

ADD CONTROLLER controller-list

/[NO]ADDRESS
/[NO]AUDIT
/KDC-LIST
/LIKE
/STATE
/TYPE

ADD KDC node-list

/[NO]ALARM
/[NO]AUDIT
/LIKE

ADD NODE node-list, ...

/[NO]ADDRESS
/[NO]ALLOW
/[NO]AUDIT
/[NO]CONTROLLER
/[NO]DECNET-ADDRESS
/INTEGRITY
/LIKE
/PORT
/SECRECY

CHECK ASSOCIATION node-l node-2

(None)

DEFINE TYPE type-name

/DIAGNOSTIC_CODE
/FIRMWARE_VERSION
/HARDWARE_VERSION
/NODES
/OPERATIONAL_CODE
/PORTS

)

;

DESNC-23

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 3 VAX KDC Commands and Qualifiers (Cont)
Commands

Qualifiers

EXIT

(None)

GENERATE INITIALIZATION_KEYS [controller-list]

/[NO]CONFIRM
/MODIFIED
/OUTPUT

HELP [keyword ... ]

(None)

MODIFY CONTROLLER controller-list

/[NO]ADDRESS
/[NO]AUDIT
/[NO]CONFIRM
/KDC-LIST
/LIKE
/NAME
/STATE
/TYPE

MODIFY KDC kdc-list

/[NO]ALARM
/[NO]AUDIT
/[NO]CONFIRM
/LIKE
/NAME

MODIFY NODE node-list

/[NO]ADDRESS
/[NO]ALLOW
/[NO]AUDIT
/[NO]CONFIRM
/[NO]CONTROLLER
/[NO]DECNET-ADDRESS
/INTEGRITY
/LIKE
/NAME
/PORT
/SECRECY

NEW AUDIT_FILE

(None)

NEW CONFIGURATION_FILE

(None)

REMOVE CONTROLLER controller-list

/[NO]CONFIRM

REMOVE KDC kdc-list

/[NO]CONFIRM

REMOVE NODE node-list

/[NO]CONFIRM

REMOVE TYPE type-name

/[NO]CONFIRM

DESNC-24

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS
~

Table 3 VAX KDC Commands and Qualifiers (Cont)
Commands

Qualifiers

SET DURATION [time]

(None)

SET GENERATED_KEYS

(None)

SET UNKNOWN

/INTEGRITY
/SECRECY

SHOW CONTROLLER [controller-list]

/MODIFIED
/[NO]OUTPUT

SHOW COUNTERS [controller-list]

/[NO]OUTPUT

SHOW DURATION

/OUTPUT

SHOW GENERATED-KEYS

/OUTPUT

SHOW KDC [kdc-list]

/OUTPUT

SHOW NODE [node-list]

/OUTPUT

SHOW STATUS [controller-list]

/[NO]AUTHENTICATE
/[NO]CURRENT
/OUTPUT

SHOW TYPE [type-name]

/OUTPUT

SHOW UNKNOWN

/OUTPUT

SHOW VERSION

/OUTPUT

SHUTDOWN

(None)

SPAWN [command-string]

(None)

TEST CONTROLLER controller-list

(None)

UPDATE [controller-list]

/[NO]LOG
/MODIFIED

DESNC-25

DESNC MAINTENANCE AIDS

DESNC Keyboard Commands

The following is a list of the DESNC keyboard commands and their functions:
1E

Extended terminator test

Network to port loop test

Enter master key (for VAX KDC DESNC only)

Enter key generation key (for VAX KDC DESNC only)

Enter key generation seed (for VAX KDC DESNC only)

Enter initialization key and VAX KDC Ethernet address (for all DESNC controllers)

DESNC-26

DESPR SINGLE-PORT REPEATER
General Description
The DESPR Ethernet single-port repeater is a Thin Wire repeater that connects one Thin Wire coaxial cable
segment of up to 185 m (607 ft) in length. Up to 29 stations can be daisy-chained on this segment. The
DESPR is connected to a standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 "backbone." There are four versions of the
DESPR in the field; however, only the DESPR-EE/EF are currently being sold.
•
•
•
•

DESPR-AA, 110 Vac
DESPR-AB, 220 Vac
DESPR-EE, 110 Vac
DESPR-EF, 220 Vac

The DESPR is identical to the DEMPR except that it has only one ThinWire port, whereas the DEMPR
has eight ThinWire ports (see Figure 1).
For information on installation, cabling, diagnostics, and maintenance aids, r~fer to the DEMPR option in
the Communications Options Minireference Manual.
NOTE
The DESPR uses the same Ethernet configuration
guidelines as the DEMPR. This includes:

)

•

There can be no more than two repeaters*
between any two stations.

•

When attaching a DESPR to a DELNI, follow
the same guidelines used when attaching a
DEMPR to a DELNI.

•

The DESPR provides ground for the ThinWire
coaxial cable. No other ground connections are
allowed.

DESPR-l

(

CARRIER
SENSE
LED

SEGMENT
LED

I~ I~·g FI,---~:_1_ _ _ __
LEGEND

POWER
LED

SELF-TEST/STATUS LED
PUSHBUTTON

:i:i TRANSCEIVER CABLE PORT @ POWER
(V

SELF-TEST

-4> CARRIER
MKV88-1251

Figure 1 DESPR-AA or -AB Rear Panel

DESPR-2

DESPR-EE/EF

)

LEGEND:
1:

2 A Thermal Circuit Breaker

AC Input Connector

115 V/235 V Voltage Selector

15-Pin D-SUB Connector (Port 0)

Port 0 Status Indicator
TOP: Green LED - Transceiver Port Power (+12 V) OK Indicator
BOTTOM: Red LED - Port 0 Segmentation Indicator

BNC Connector (Port 1)

Activity and Port 1 Status Indicator
TOP: Green LED - Any Network Activity Indicator
BOTTOM: Red LED - Port 1 Segmentation Indicator

Loop-on Self-Test Jumper

Reset Switch with Red LED (self-test indicator)
MA-0972-88

Figure 2 DESPR-EE or -EF Rear Panel

DESPR-3

(

DESQA INSTALLATION
DESQA COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
General Description
The DESQA module is a Q-Bus communications controller that enables higher-level software, such as
DECnet, to communicate over an Ethernet network.
The DESQA module conforms to the Ethernet Local Area Network Specification (Version 2.0) and is
compatible with IEEE Specification 802.3 for local area networks.
The DESQA module provides a high-speed asynchronous connection between a Q-Bus system and a local
area network (LAN) based on Ethernet or IEEE 802.3. The DESQA can also support either of two possible
baseband Ethernet cabling systems - Standard (Thickwire) or ThinWire Ethernet. A jumper block on the
module is used to select the cabling system. The DESQA can also connect to a broadband network using a
broadband transceiver.
The DESQA is functionally equivalent to the DELQA with a cabkit for Thickwire networks combined with
a DESTA ThinWire transceiver for interfacing to ThinWire networks.
The DESQA module is programmed from the Q-Bus using eight-word addresses in the I/O page, and can
perform block-mode DMA to and from Q-Bus memory. In addition to providing an Ethernet interface, the
DESQA module supports some functions of the Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP).
DESQA Features
The DESQA module operates in one of two switchable modes: Normal mode or DEQNA-lock mode.
In Normal mode, the DESQA module supports the following functions.
•

Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP) messages for Remote BOOT, Request 10, Transmit
System ID, and Loopback.

•

IEEE 802.3 Maintenance messages for XID and TEST on NULL LSAP access points.

•

Self-test on power-up and via host command.

•

Single Ethernet physical address.

•

Multiple Ethernet multicast address.

•

All standard DEQNA functions, except multiple Ethernet physical address and the automatic
enabling of the on-board sanity timer at power-up.

In DEQNA-lock mode, the DESQA module provides functional compatibility with DEQNA modules but at
the expense of some Normal mode functions. The functions supported are:
•

Multiple Ethernet physical addresses.

•

Multiple Ethernet multicast addresses.

•

Sanity timer (switch enabled on power-up).

DESQA-l

DESQA INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DESQA communications controller.

•

DECnet Maintenance Operations Protocol (MOP)
Functional Specification V3. O.

AA-X436A-TK

•
•
•
•
•
•

DECnet-RSX System Manager's Guide

AA-H224C-TC

DECnet-ULTRIX Guide to Network Management

AA-EE38A-TE

DECnet-VAX System Manager's Guide

AA-H803C-TE

DEC/Xii User's Manual

AC-F053-MC

DESQA Technical Manual

EK-DESQA-TM

DESQA-SF Switch able Q-Bus to Ethernet
Adapter Option Installation Guide

EK-DESQA-IN

Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-02435

•

DESQA Components
The DESQA-SF option kit consist.s of:
•

One DESQA-S Q-Bus to Ethernet adapter module (M3127-PA)

•

One DESQA-SF Switch able Q-Bus to Ethernet Adapter Option Installation Guide
(EK-DESQA-IN)

•

One gap filler assembly, consisting of a gap filler and two flathead screws (70-24505-01)

•

One BNC TEE connector (12-25869-01)

•

Two BNC 50 ohm terminators (12-26318-02)

•

One ThinWire cable clamp (12-29702-01)

Device Placement
Up to two DESQA modules can be used in each system, and these should be the highest priority devices on
the Q22-Bus.
Bus Grant Continuity - To ensure the continuity of the bus grant signal, use bus grant continuity cards
(M9047) in empty backplane slots.
Power Supplies - The BA200 series enclosure contains one or two 230 watt power supplies.
•

A 6-s10t enclosure has one power supply.

•

A 12-s10t enclosure has two power supplies. The power supply on the right side powers slots 1
through 6, and the power supply on the left side powers slots 7 through 12.

Each power supply in the enclosure must have a minimum 5 amp load on the +5 volt output. If this is not
the case, install an M9060-YA load module in one of the open slots powered by that power supply.
If a power supply meets the minimum load requirement, remove an existing load module.

DESQA-2

DESQA INSTALLATION

Recommended Order of Modules - Use Table 1 as a guide when installing modules.

Table 1

Recommended M'i)dule Order

MicroVAX

MicroPDP-ll/53

MicroPDP-II/83

KA620/KA630
MS630-B/-C
MRVII
DELQA/DESQA
DPYl1
DFA01
DZQl1
CXAI6
CXBI6
CXY08
IEQ1 1*
IBQOI *
DRQ3B
DRYIW
TQKSO**
RQDX3**

KDJ11-SA/-SB
MSV11-QA
MRV11
DELQA/DESQA
DPV11
DFAOI
DZQ11
CXA16
CXBI6
CXY08
IEQ11*
DRQ3B
DRV1W
TQK50**
RQDX3**

KDJI1-BF
MSV11-JD/-JE
MRV11
DELQA/DESQA
DPV11
DFA01
DZQ11
CXA16
CXB16
CXY08
IEQll *
DRQ3B
DRV1W
TQK50**
RQDX3**

* No restrictions on position.
**Not to be installed in the BA214 enclosure.

Power Requirements/Q-Bus Loading
Table 2 shows the power requirements and bus loading for the DESQA module.

Table 2

Power Requirements/Q-Bus Loading

Q-BUS LOAD

POWER

CURRENT
Maximum

Typical

Maximum

+12 V

+5 V +12 V

13.27 W

31.S W

2.1S A 0.21 A

2.7 A I.S A

Typical

3.3

O.S

+S V

DESQA-3

DESQA INSTALLATION

Installing the Module

OBTAIN CUSTOMER
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
• SYSTEM
PLACEMENT
• DEVICE PLACEMENT
• BUS LOADING
• POWER
REQUIREMENTS
• CUSTOMER
APPLICATION
REQUIREMENTS:
I.E DEVICE ADDRESS.
VECTOR ADDRESS.
ETC.

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED
APPLY POWER. VERIFY
SELECTED BACKPLANE
SLOT VOLTAGES. THEN
TURN POWER OFF

DO NOT INSTALL
OPTION

DEVICE ADDRESS S1
MODE/OPTION S3 AND

_ _ _
{

S4 JUMPER BLOCK =
ThinWire

MKV88·1850

Figure 1

Installation Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 3)

DESQA-4

DESQAINSTALLATION

RELOCATE MODULES
AND GRANT
CONTINUITY CARDS
AS NECESSARY TO
FREE THE APPROPRIATE BACKPLANE
SLOT(S) FOR THE
DESQA MODULE(S)

INSTALL THE DESQA
MODULE INTO THE
PROPER SLOT (TABLE
1)

INSTALL OR REMOVE
POWER SUPPLY LOAD
MODULES AS REQUIRED

CONNECT A
TEE-CONNECTOR AND
TWO TERMINATORS
TO THE DESQA BNC
CONNECTOR

TURN THE SYSTEM
POWER ON AND
ENSURE THAT THE
ThinWire MODE
SELECT LED IS ON

TURN THE SYSTEM
POWER OFF AND
DIScbNNECT THE
POWER CORD

MKV88-1849

Figure 1

Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 2 of 3)

DESQA-5

DESQA INSTALLATION

RECONFIGURE THE
DESQA MODULE AS
REQUIRED FOR THE
CUSTOMER

TYPE 1 AT THE MAIN
MENU TO ADD NEW
MODULE TO CONFIGURATION FILE·

TYPE 2 AT THE MAIN
MENU TO SHOW
THE SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

TYPE T AT THE MAIN
MENU TO RUN THE
SYSTEM TESTS

TYPE 1 AT THE MAIN
MENU TO RUN
SYSTEM TEST

MKV88-1848

Figure 1

Installation Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 3)

DESQA-6

DESQA INSTALLATION

!lESQA Module Address and Vector
The DESQA module CSR address and interrupt vector are set using switchpack E15 (Figure 2). Table 3
shows the functions of the switch pack.
When a DESQA module is added to the backplane, the modules already in the system may have to be
reconfigured. If it is necessary to reconfigure existing modules, their CSR addresses and interrupt vectors
need to be determined
Determine the CSR address and interrupt vector of modules as follows.
•

For MicroPDP-II systems, refer to the MicroPDP-ll System Maintenance Guide.

•

For MicroVAX systems:
Use the CON FIG program, or
Manually calculate values as shown in Chapter 5 of the Micro VA X Systems Maintenance
Guide.

•

For devices that were not manufactured by Digital Equipment Corporation, see the vendors'
documentation for the configuration information.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage the DESQA module.
Always wear an antistatic wrists trap connected to an
active ground, and use a grounded work surface when
working on a system with covers removed.

DESQA Switch and Jumper Settings
The cabling mode of the DESQA is selected by a jumper block (Figure 2). The jumper can be in one of two
possible positions. To select Thin Wire, cover the middle row of pins and the pins labeled Thin Wire. To select
Thickwire, cover the middle row of pins and the pins labeled Thickwire. The DESQA module is shipped
from the factory in Thin Wire cable mode.
The DESQA module switches (Figure 2) must be set for compatibility with the host system configuration.
The DESQA contains five switches, SI through SS. Only three switches, however, are used to establish a
DESQA configuration. The remaining switches are reserved. Table 3 shows the switches and their
descri ptions.
The default switch settings are all closed which results in the following.
•
•
•

Base address = 17774440
Mode = NORMAL
MOP remote boot DISABLED

The default switch settings are the recommended configuration for most applications.

DESQA-7

DESQA INSTALLATION

JUMPER BLOCK
000
000

FACTORY SETTING

000
000
000
000
000
000
000

~~~~~

'-r-'
'-r-'

ThinWire J

S2 S3 S4 S5

LThickwire

OPEN

DOD

D
o

CJ
CJ

D
MKV88-1957

Figure 2

DESQA Module Layout

DESQA-8

DESQA INSTALLATION
Table 3

DESQA Switches

Switch

Position

Description
UNIT SELECT Switch

Closed
Open

Selects the modules default address (17774440)
Selects the address 17774460

Reserved

MODE Switch
Closed
Open

Selects Normal mode
Selects DEQNA-Iock mode
S3 determines the function of S4 as shown below.

OPTION Switch - Function is determined by S3 as follows.

Closed

Remote boot DISABLED

Closed

Open

Remote boot ENABLED

Open

Closed

Sanity timer DISABLED at power-up

Open

Sanity timer ENABLED at power-up*

* This condition causes a host boot every four minutes if the sanity timer is not reset by the host software.

Ethernet Address
The unique physical address of the DESQA module within Ethernet is stored in the station address ROM on
the DESQA module. A record of this address is printed on a sticker on the handle of the module. This
address should be given to the network manager for configuration.
CAUTION
Because of the risk of damage to the module and
ROM, the following procedure is not recommended
and should only be used if there is no alternative.
If it is necessary to replace the DESQA module while retaining the same physical Ethernet address, it is
possible to swap the station address ROM to the replacement module. The stickers must be swapped also if
this procedure is used.
If the Ethernet address is changed, the only software change required is to update the physical Ethernet
address of the node at those host systems that use the node for down-line loading over the Ethernet.

DESQA-9

DESQA CABLING

Connection to the Network
When the diagnostics have shown an error-free system, connect the DESQA module to either a standard
Ethernet network or to a Thin Wire network.
CAUTION
Before connecting the DESQA module into an
existing ThinWire network, inform the system manager that the network service will be disrupted.

Connecting the DESQA Module to ThinWire Ethernet -

Connect the TEE connector to the BNC connector on the DESQA module handle.

Connect the ThinWire Ethernet cable(s) to the TEE connector (Figure 3). If only one ThinWire cable
is connected to the TEE connector, ensure that the unused TEE connection is terminated using a
terminator (PIN: 12-26318-01) supplied with the module. If two cables are connected, the cables
must be routed as shown in Figure 4 using the cable clamp (PIN: 12-29702-01) supplied with the
module.

Install the covers that were removed to gain access to the modules.

BNC
TERMINATOR
TEE
CONNECTOR
ThlnWlre

MA·X0393·BB

Figure 3

Connecting the DESQA Module to One ThinWire Cable

DESQA-IO

DESQA CABLING

MINIMUM
RECOMMENDED
BEND RADIUS IS
44.5 MM (1-3/4 IN)

MKV88-1959

Figure 4

Connecting the DESQA Module to Two
Thin Wire Cables

DESQA-ll

DESQA CABLING

Connecting the DESQA Module to Standard Ethernet l.

Connect the male connector of an Ethernet transceiver cable (P /N: BNE3B o~ BNE3D) to the female
connector on the DESQA module. Table 4 lists the transceiver cable options.

Connect the other end of the cable to one of the following devices.

An H4000 transceiver (located on a traditional baseband Ethernet cable).

A DELNI, which can be connected to a baseband Ethernet or configured in a standalone LAN.

Install the covers that were removed to gain access to the modules.

Table 4

BNE3X-nn Transceiver Cable Options

Cable

Material

Connector

Length

BNE3B-05/12
BNE3B-IO/12
BNE3B-20/J2
BNE3B-40/12

PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC

Right-angle
Right-angle
Right-angle
Right-angle

5 m (16.4 ft)
10m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3D-05/ J2
BNE3D-IO/J2
BNE3D-20/J2
BNE3D-40/12

Teflon™
Teflon™
Teflon™
Teflon™

Right-angle
Right-angle
Right-angle
Right-angle

5 m (16.4 ft)
10m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

Teflon is a trademark of E.I DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc.

DESQA-12

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS
DESQA Diagnostics
The DESQA module is designed to help diagnostics find a faulty field replaceable unit (FRU) rapidly. In
addition to the self-test, there are diagnostic tests that are processor specific ..
Self-Test
The DESQA module has a power-up self-test that includes an external loopback test.
NOTE
In order for the external loopback test to pass, the
DESQA must be connected to a valid Ethernet network or to an externalloopback connector. For Standard Ethernet, use the bulkhead loopback connector
(12-22196-02) or, alternatively, an "4080 Ethernet
tester. For ThinWire, the "T" piece with two terminators (12-26318-01) attached should be connected
to the BNC connector.
The self-test is only valid in Normal mode, and the host operating system software can request the self-test
through the DESQA Q-Bus register.
Table 5 shows the power-up LED sequence and Table 6 shows the remote boot LED sequence when the selftest is run.

Table 5

Module LED Sequences (Power-Up)

LEDI

LED2

LED3

Definition

Normal Mode

OFF

Executing internal logic self-test.

OFF

Self-test executing external loopback test.

Ready (to execute Citizenship tests and/
or normal functions) or module self-test.

LEDs turn ON and stay ON.

DEQNA-Iock Mode

DESQA-13

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

Table 6

Module LED Sequences (Remote Boot or Citizenship Test) Normal or DEQNA-lock Mode

LEDt

LED2

LED3

Definition

Ready (to execute Citizenship test and/or normal functions) or module
self-test.

OFF

Executing Citizenship tests.

OFF

Internal loopback Citizenship tests completed successfully.

OFF

Externalloopback Citizenship tests completed successfully.

These sequences of LEOs should take less than 10 seconds. If the LEOs flash after this time, an irrecoverable failure has occurred (see Table 7).

Table 7

Irrecoverable Failure Indications

LEDt

LED2

LED3

Failure Indication

OFF

Q-bus failure

OFF

LANCE failure

OFF

68000 exception

Firmware fault

F indicates that the LED is flashing.

OESQA-14

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics for PDP-II Host Processors
NETWORK TESTING
•

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP)

•

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) running under the Diagnostic Runtime Services (DSR)

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP) - This diagnostic provides a command-driven interface for
executing loopback tests on the Ethernet, and for examining network and data-link counters.
Some of the relevant commands are:
LOOP
SHOW
TELL
TRIGGER
The TRIGGER command may be used to initiate boot loading from the DESQA for PDP-II host systems
that have the appropriate boot ROM support.
The commands may be issued either from the local host system or by using the TELL command from a
remote node. The functions are performed concurrently with other DEC net operations, and do not interfere
with other Ethernet traffic (although there may be some degradation of throughput).
For more information, refer to the DECnet- VAX System Manager's Guide.
Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) - This diagnostic is used to:
•

Determine the connectivity of nodes on the Ethernet.

•

Determine the ability of nodes to communicate with each other.

•

Support node installation verification and problem isolation.

The NIE does not test the DESQA, but does test the communications link to which it is connected;
therefore, the NIE assumes that the DESQA has successfully completed the Citizenship test.
The NIE is used with XXDP+ and the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor.
Refer to the DESQA Technical Manual, Appendix B, for additional information.
MODULE TESTING
•

Field Functional Diagnostic (ZQNA??) running under Diagnostic Runtime Services (DSR)

•

DEC/X I I Exerciser

DESQA-I5

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

Field Functional Diagnostic (ZQNA??) - This diagnostic tests the DESQA in Q-Bus systems. It attempts to
isolate faults to the FRU.
Tests are executed under the supervision of the Diagnostic Runtime Services (XXDP+) and controlled by an
operator from a console.
ZQNA?? is not an Ethernet network exerciser but verifies that the DESQA can execute Ethernet protocol,
and that valid network traffic can be transmitted and received.
ZQNA?? tests the DESQA in all loopback modes with or without an external loopback connector or
transceiver connected.
External loopback mode is used with a connected transceiver or externalloopback connector. Alternatively,
external loopback mode can be used with a terminated transceiver that is not attached to a network cable.
Executing ZQNA?? using external loopback mode, in a system connected to a live Ethernet, does not
disrupt the Ethernet.
DEC/XII Exerciser - This diagnostic exercises one DESQA at maximum activity rates. It transmits and
receives random-length packets (using either 18- or 22-bit physical address space). The DESQA transmits
and receives the same packet.

DESQA-16

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics for MicroVAX Processors
NETWORK TESTING
•

DECnet Network Control Program (NCP)

•

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) running under the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

MODULE TESTING
•

MicroVAX Diagn.ostic Monitor (MDM)

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor - This diagnostic offers the following menu-driven tests and utilities that
may be run in Verify or Service modes.
•

Utilities for external loopback tests and NIE.

•

Service tests for externalloopback.

•

Device exerciser for testing the DESQA simultaneously with other system devices.

Troubleshooting
The general strategy for identifying a fault is to:
1.

Check the DESQA configuration to ensure that the system can identify the module correctly.

Run the module test(s) to check for faulty FRUs.

Run the network test(s) to locate faults in the network configuration and/or operation.

Figures 5 and 6 are flowcharts for troubleshooting the DESQA module. If the DESQA is configured in the
ThinWire mode, use Figure 5. If the DESQA is configured for a standard Ethernet, use Figure 6.

DESQA-17

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

RUN NIE (NETWORK
INTERCONNECT
EXERCISER)
TO IDENTIFY
FAILING NODE

POWER DOWN HOST AND
CHECK DESQA FUSE (IN
HANDLE) AND PICO FUSE
(ON PCB): IF BOTH O.K.
CHECK HOST POWER: IF
O.K. REPLACE DESQA

POWER DOWN HOST
AND CHECK JUMPER
BLOCK SELECTION. IF
CORRECT REPLACE
DESQA.

NETWORK PROBLEM

POSSIBLE NETWORK
IHOSTI DESQA
PROBLEM
CALL SUPPORT
MKV88-1960

Figure 5

DESQA Troubleshooting (ThinWire Mode)

DESQA-18

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

RUN NIE (NETWORK
INTERCONNECT
EXERCISER)
TO IDENTIFY
FAILING NODE

POWER DOWN HOST AND
CHECK DESQA FUSE (IN
HANDLE) AND PICO FUSE
(ON PCB): IF BOTH O.K.
CHECK HOST POWER: IF
O.K. REPLACE DESQA

POWER DOWN HOST
AND CHECK JUMPER
BLOCK SELECTION. IF
CORRECT REPLACE
DESQA.

MKV88-1961

Figure 6

DESQA Troubleshooting - Standard Ethernet (Sheet 1 of 2)

DESQA-19

DESQA DIAGNOSTICS

REPLACE DESQA IF
FAULT PERSISTS.
: > - - - - - . . . - 1 OBTAIN H4080 AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR FURTHER TESTING

REPLACE TRANSCEIVER

">-----~ CABLE

REPLACE DESQA

NETWORK PROBLEM

POSSIBLE NETWORKI
HOST/DESQA
PROBLEM: CALL
SUPPORT
MKV88·1962

Figure 6

DESQA Troubleshooting - Standard Ethernet (Sheet 2 of 2)

DESQA-20

DESQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Field Replaceable Units
Figure 7 shows the field replaceable units in the DESQA installation.
Thickwire
ETHERNET

TRANSCEIVER

HOST
SYSTEM

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

DESQA
MODULE

LED

BULKHEAD
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR

FUSE 5 A PICO FUSE
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON CORRECT FUSE SEE FUSES BELOW
MKV88-1857

Figure 7

Field Replaceable Units

DESQA-21

DESQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Fuses
A 1.5 A/250 V Slo-BloTM fuse (order number 90-07213) protects the transceiver and its associated external
wiring. This fuse is located in the DESQA bulkhead. The fuse may be replaced by:
•
•
•

Littiefuse™ type 31301.5,
BEL FUSpM type 3SB1.5, or
An equivalent.

A 5.0 A/125 V axial lead pico fuse (order number 12-05747-00) protects the DESQA module and internal
wiring. This fuse is soldered to the DESQA module and looks like a resistor.
Citizenship Test Descriptions
Table 8 lists the host register RO bit combinations, the test being run, and their meanings for the Citizenship
tests.
Table 9 shows the LED display results for the Citizenship test.
Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP)
In Normal mode the DESQA implements (MOP) functions in response to the following remote console
messages from other nodes on the Ethernet.
•

The request system 10 message - The DESQA responds by transmitting its current system ID
message.

•

Remote boot trigger instruction - The DESQA may respond to a trigger instruction only if option
switch S4 is open to enable remote boot. The instruction can only be implemented if the host
system has the appropriate boot ROM.

•

Loopback request message - The DESQA responds to a loopback request message.

The DESQA also transmits its current system 10 parameters automatically every 8 to 10 minutes.
For more information, refer to the DECnet Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP) functional specification.
IEEE 802.3 Network Support
In Normal mode the DESQA implements IEEE 802.3 logical link control messages when they are received
on a NULL Link-layer Service Access Point (LSAP) within an 802.3 standard local area network.
These messages can be used to interrogate and test many link layer service points per node. Therefore, IEEE
802.3 logical link control messages which are received on a non-NULL LSAP are passed on to the host
system as normal datagrams.
For details on this message format and protocol, refer to the ANSI/IEEE Draft International Standard
802.2 logical link control.

Sio-Blo is a trademark of S.B. Fuses
Littlefuse is a trademark of Littlefuse Inc.
BEL FUSE is a trademark of Belfuse Inc.

DESQA-22

DESQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 8

Citizenship Test Error Status

RO Bit
Combinations

Test

Description
Station Address Verification - Station address is all zeros, or all ones, or is
not a valid DESQA address. If this test fails, testing continues until the
final external loopback test or another test failure occurs.

2,4

No interrupt, premature interrupt, wrong interrupt, or unexpected receive
interrupt.

12,01

Set-up Mode and Receive Processing Test - Set-up packet echoed data
check.

09,12,01

Set-up Mode and Receive Processing Test - Set-up packet operatio~
timeout.

14,12,01

Set-up Mode and Receive Processing Test - Set-up operation status
check.

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - Transmit/receive data compare check.

09,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - True packet transmission
and receive error.

12,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - Set-up packet echoed data
check.

14,02

Internal Loopback and Address Filter Test - False packet receive error.

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - General packet transmit/receive data compare check. Long packet not detected.

09,03

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - Test packet transmit or
receive timeout.

14,03

Internal Extended Loopback and Protocol Test - General operation status
check. Long packet not detected via operation status.

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Transmit (scatter/gather)
data check.

09,04

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Transmit (special) and receive
timeout.

14,04

DMA to Q-Bus Interface Processing Test - Receive or transmit operation
status check.

Transceiver Operational and Status - Set-up packet echo data check.

DESQA-23

DESQA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 8

Citizenship Test Error Status (Cont)

RO Bit
Combinations

Test

Description

09,12

Transceiver Operational and Status - Set-up packet operation timeout.

14,12

Transceiver Operational and Status - Set-up packet operation status
check.

7,8

CSR carrier bit on too long.

7,8

External loopback not operational.

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - External loopback
transmitted/received packet data compare check.

09,05

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - Externalloopback operation timeout.

14,05

External Loopback and Ethernet Protocol Test - Externalloopback operation status check.

Table 9

Citizenship Test LED Results

LEDl

LED2

LED3

Meaning

OFF

Citizenship test passed successfully

OFF

External loopback test failed

OFF

DESQA internal error

Cannot upload the BD ROM contents
or the first set-up packet prefill failed

DESQA-24

DESTA INSTALLATION

DESTA STATION ADAPTER
General Description
The DESTA Ethernet station adapter provides a physical and electrical interface between a ThinWire
Ethernet coaxial cable and other Ethernet devices (such as controllers, servers, and so on) via the Ethernet
transceiver cable.
The DESTA attaches to the ThinWire cable via a BNC type TEE connector. It has a IS-pin D-connector
for connecting to a transceiver cable.
The DESTA is transparent to the data layers and is not addressable or programmable in any way.
There is only one version of the DESTA although a switch allows enabling or disabling heartbeat (which is
sometimes known as collision presence test or CPT).

MKV86-0562

Figure 1 DESTA Station Adapter
ThinWire Coaxial Segment Cabling Guidelines
•

The ThinWire coaxial cable can be up to 185 m (607 ft) long.

•

No more than 30 stations are allowed on a segment. The DEMPR, if configured, counts as
one station. In a DECconnect configuration with faceplates and satellite equipment rooms,
only 28 stations are allowed.

•

On the ThinWire coaxial cable there must be at least 0.5 m (1.6 ft) of ThinWire coaxial
cable between DESTA station adapters or other station attachments (see Figure 3).

•

No coaxial cable may be placed between the TEE connector and the DESTA (or station).
The TEE connector attaches directly to the DESTA or station.

•

No more than 60 male/female connector junctions are allowed on the coaxial segment (see
Figure 9, connections 1 or 2). For example, both a barrel connector and a TEE connector
have two male/female connector junctions.

DESTA-l

DESTA INSTALLATION

•

The ThinWire coaxial cable must be properly terminated at both ends with 50-ohm
terminators.

•

The male (third) connection of a TEE connector must not be terminated (see Figure 9,
connection 3).

•

The male connection of the TEE connector (Figure 9, connection 3) does not count towards
the maximum of 60 male/female connections.

•

When disconnecting a station that is attached to a TEE connector, disconnect the connector
attached to the DESTA or station. Disconnecting the connector to the DESTA does not
affect the Thin Wire coaxial cable segment, but disconnecting either coaxial cable will
disable the entire segment.

•

A DEREP cannot be connected to a DESTA.

FACEPLATE

MKV86·0561

Figure 2 DESTA Configuration

DESTA-2

DEST A INSTALLATION

f - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 185 M

•

MAXIMUM

TERMINATOR

1_ 0.5M
J
IMINIMUMI
UP TO 30 STATIONS
MKV86-0563

Figure 3 ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable with Two Terminators

185 M

1-01-.1------------MAXIMUM
I
FACEPLATE

SER

L 0.5 M
----..I
IMINIMUMI

TERMINATOR

UP TO 28 STATIONS
MKV86-0564

Figure 4 ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable from an SER

DESTA-3

DESTAINSTALLATION
FCC and Grounding Requirements
This product generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy. When used with a DEQNA Ethernet
Controller, it has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules if the following configuration rules are followed:
1.

For DESTA adapters Revision Bl and earlier, the BNExx-xx transceiver cable from the system
Ethernet bulkhead to the DESTA must be at least 20 m (65.4 ft) in length.

The ThinWire segment must be properly grounded if it is not connected to a DEMPR
(DIGITAL ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater). This can be attained by connecting a 7.62
cm (3 in) ground wire from the TEE connector to the DESTA as shown in Figure 5.

Failure to observe the above configuration rules can cause the system containing the DESTA not to
comply with FCC Class A limits (functional operation is still intact).

TEE CONNECTOR
(12-25534-01 )

MA-0959-86

Figure 5

Proper Grounding of the ThinWire Segment
DESTA-4

DESTA INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information regarding the DESTA.

•
•
•
•
•
•

DESTA Technical Manual

EK-DESTA-TM

DIGITAL ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter Installation Card

EK-DESTA-IN

DESTA Installation Card

EK-DESTA-IN

DESTA Print Set

MP-02090

DEMPR Installation User's Guide

EK-DEMPR-UG

DEMPR Ethernet Multiport Repeater Technical Manual

EK-DEMPR-TM

•

DECconnect System General Description

EK-DECSY-GD

•
•
•
•
•
•

DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook

EK-DECSY-EG

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

DECconnect System Installation Verification Guide

EK-DECSY-VG

H4000- T A Ethernet Transceiver Tester User's Guide

EK-ETHTT-UG

DECconnect System ThinWire Planning and Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-IG

ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Installation Card

EK-CABLE-IN

Table 1 DESTA Transceiver Part Numbers
Description

Part
Designation

DIGITAL Ethernet station adapter

DESTA-AA

VelcroTM strips (2 3/4 in)

12-26595-01

BNC 50-ohm terminator

H8225

BNC barrel connector

H8224

Male BNC connector

H8222

Thin Wire TEE connector

H8223

Installation card

EK-DESTA-IN-OOI

ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Installation Card

EK-CABLE-IN

Velcro is a trademark of VELCRO USA, Inc.

DESTA-5

DESTA INSTALLATION
Power Requirements
Power for the DESTA is +12 Vdc (-I1.S0 to -IS.60 Vdc) at 0 to SOO rnA. The +12 Vdc is supplied
externally from the user's Ethernet controller.
Physical Specifications
Length - 9.3 cm (3.7 in)
Width - 7.6 cm (3.0 in)
Height - 3.S cm (1.2 in)
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature Range
Preinstallation Considerations
Prior to installing the DESTA, check the following:
1.

Verify that the configuration guidelines are followed per the ThinWire coaxial segment cabling
guidelines.

Verify that a properly terminated and tested ThinWire coaxial cable has been identified,
located, and is available for installation of the DESTA (refer to the DECconnect System
Installation Verification Guide EK-DECSY-VG). Both ends of the ThinWire coaxial cable
must be terminated. A DEMPR, if used, will supply termination for one end of the coaxial
cable; a SO-ohm terminator must be used at the other end. Terminators are attached to the
coaxial cable via a barrel or TEE connector.

Component

Part Number

BNC SO-ohm terminator
BNC barrel connector
BNC TEE connector

H822S
H8224
H8223

Determine if a TEE connector has already been installed on the coaxial cable for the installation
of the DESTA. If not, a TEE connector will need to be installed on the coaxial cable. This may
require cable termination. Cable termination is the action of installing a male BNC connector
on a cable end (refer to the Cabling chapter of the Communications Options Minireference
Manual - Volume 5 or the ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Installation Card).
If termination is required, ensure that the tools and connector parts needed for BNC termination are available.

Tool/Part

Part Number

BNC crimping tool (with dies installed)
Coaxial wire stripper
Spare blade cassette for coaxial wire stripper
Male BNC connector

47-0011S-01
47-00114-01
29-26133-00
H8222

NOTE
Installation of the DESTA may require that the
ThinWire coaxial cable segment be cut and terminated. The termination process will make the
Ethernet segment unavailable to any other users.
Other LAN segments should remain unaffected.
(Refer to the Cabling chapter of the Communications Options Minireference Manual - Volume 5 for
termination procedures.)

DESTA-6

DESTA INSTALLATION

Verify that the transceiver cable going to the station is installed.

Verify that a terminated length of Thin Wire coaxial cable is available to go from the faceplate
to the DESTA (if the faceplate is used).

Set the DESTA heartbeat ENABLED/DISABLED switch. The DESTA has a switch-selectable heartbeat. Heartbeat is sometimes referred to as collision presence test or CPT. The
DESTA is shipped with heartbeat ENABLED. (Refer to Figure 6 for disabling heartbeat.)

Hardware Requirements

The following hardware items may be needed for completion of the installation and are not included with
the DESTA.

)

IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable, such as BNE3x-xx or BNE4x-xx, which is ordered in various
lengths and types. The transceiver cable will connect the DESTA to the Ethernet station
controller. Use of IEEE 802.3 compliant transceievr cable is required. (Refer to Table 3 in the
Cabling chapter of the Communications Options Minireference Manual - Volume 5 for part
numbers).

Parts for two BNC male connectors may be required when the TEE connector is to be installed
on the coaxial cable. (Refer to the ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Installation Card).

A terminated coaxial cable, used from the faceplate to the DESTA TEE connectors, or from
the last station to the DESTA being installed.

Heartbeat Selection

DIMPLE

SWITCHES DOWN
HEARTBEAT
DISABLED

SWITCHES UP
HEARTBEAT
ENABLED

NOTES
1. SWITCHES TOWARD DIMPLE ENABLE HEARTBEAT.
2. SWITCHES AWAY FROM DIMPLE DISABLE HEARTBEAT.
3. CONSULT DECconnect DOCUMENTATION FOR
HEARTBEAT SELECTION.
MKV86-0565

Figure 6

DESTA Heartbeat Selection Switch

DESTA-7

DESTA INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram

VERIFY THAT
COAXIAL CABLE IS
TERMINATED AND
INSTALLED

ATTACH TEE CONNECTOR TO BNC
CONNECTOR ON
YOUR DESTA (SEE
FIGURE 9, ITEM #3)

ATTACH YOUR
ThinWire ETHERNET
CABLE TO THE
FACEPLATE RECEPTACLE AND TO TEE
CONNECTOR. ATTACH
TERMINATOR TO
YOUR TEE CONNECTOR IF IT IS THE
LAST DESTA TO BE
INSTALLED.

ATTACH THE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
TO THE 15-PIN CONNECTOR ON YOUR
DESTA STATION

ATTACH YOUR
ThinWire ETHERNET
CABLE TO ONE SIDE
OF THE TEE CONNECTOR. ATTACH
TERMINATOR TO THE
OTHER SIDE OF TEE
CONNECTOR IF IT IS
THE LAST DESTA TO
BE INSTALLED.

VERIFY INSTALLATION (REFER TO
INSTALLATION
VERIFICATION - NEXT PAGE)

MKVB7·1262

Figure 7

DESTA Installation Flow Diagram
DESTA-8

DESTA INSTALLATION
Installation Verification
Ensure that the Ethernet station controller or device is powered ON. Verify that the DESTA has power
applied (green power LED ON). If this LED is OFF, a failure is indicated. The failure may be the
Ethernet station power supply, the Ethernet transceiver cable, or the DESTA.
There are no diagnostics specifically written for the DESTA. Use one or more of the following to verify
proper operation.
•

Station controller external data loopback self-tests, which if available, will completely test the
DESTA. The station controller test, however, will not detect a coaxial cable problem.

•

NIE and NCP Utility programs, which can be used for station-to-station testing.

•

Two H4000-TA Revision B transceiver testers, which are IEEE 802.3 compatible for transceiver testing. Earlier versions of the H4000-TA need to be modified for IEEE 802.3. A metal
connector on the H4000-TA is a quick check to ensure that the H4000-TA is IEEE 802.3
compatible.

•

Nodes, which can be used for station-to-station testing.

DESTA-9

DESTA CABLING
Cabling

DECconnect
FACEPLATE

DEMPR
TERMINATOR

i~!OIo!.!.""'''

I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I

---- --

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

DEVICE

ThinWire
ETHERNET
CABLE

50-OHM
/TERMINATOR
ON LAST
DEVICE

MKV87-1263

Figure 8 DESTA Cabling

DESTA-lO

DESTA DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

There are no diagnostics specifically written for the DESTA. Use one or more of the following to verify
proper operation.
•

Station controller external data loopback self-tests, which if available, will completely test the
DESTA. The station controller test, however, will not detect a coaxial cable problem.

•

NIE and NCP Utility programs, which can be used for station-to-station testing.

•

Nodes, which can be used for station-to-station testing.

DESTA-ll

DESTA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Maintenance Aids
When terminating the ThinWire coaxial cable with BNC connectors, disconnect the ThinWire coaxial
segment from the DEMPR.
When working with the DESTA, avoid disconnecting the coaxial cable from the TEE connector (Figure 9,
connections 1 and 2). If the coaxial cable is disconnected from the TEE connector, all the stations on the
entire segment will be unable to communicate with each other and the rest of the LAN.
It is recommended that the BNC connectors, terminators, and TEE connectors used with the ThinWire
coaxial cable have gold-plated center conductors. Use "boots" or electrical tape to ensure that a safety
hazard is not created by improper grounding.
TERMINATOR

TEE
:t?3
CONNECTOR.
~
2

~<'
ThinWire
ETHERNET
CABLE
MKV87·1264

Figure 9 TEE Connector

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
The following item is the FRU for the DESTA station adapter.
DESTA-AA which consists of the following:
•
•
•

DESTA,
BNC TEE connector, and
Two Velcro™ strips.

A DESTA can be ordered separately, without the TEE or Velcro™ (PIN 70-22782-01).

DESTA-12

DESTA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Cable Testing
For new coaxial cable installations and suspected coaxial cable problems, an ohmmeter should be used to
verify coaxial cable continuity. Measure the resistance between the coaxial shield and the center conductor
to check termination and cable continuity. These measurements can be made at the BNC or at the TEE
connector.
With both ends terminated, the center conductor-to-shield resistance of connection 3, Figure 9 of the
installed TEE connector will measure approximately 25 ohms of resistance. If only one end is terminated,
or the TEE is disconnected from one side of the coaxial cable, the meter wIll indicate 59.75 ohms. If the
coaxial cable is unterminated, the meter will indicate infinity. Resistance measurements will vary depending on the lengths of coaxial cable being measured.
NOTE
Cable continuity testing is important because testing
will not detect a shorted cable. Point-to-point testing, however, is the best means available to verify the
cable and transceiver.

RCONN

RSHIELD
CONNECTOR
UNDER
TEST

RSHIELD = RESISTANCE OF COAXIAL CABLE SHIELD
RCONN = CONNECTOR RESISTANCE
RT = TERMINATOR RESISTANCE = 49.9 Q ± 0.1%
RCEN = CENTER CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE
RTOT = RSHIELD + RCONN + RT + RCEN
= 49Q T059.75!2
MKV86·0576

Figure 10 Coaxial Cable Segment Equivalent Circuit

DESTA-13

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

DECxpress 100 GATEWAY
General Description
The DECxpress 100 gateway (DEFAT-AA) shown in Figure 1 is a software-dependent gateway used to
connect an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 network to the Datakit™ network using <\ fiber optic link.
The DECxpress 100 gateway can connect up to 512 multiplexed logical channels from a Datakit Virtual
Circuit Switch (VCS™) to VAX processors on an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 network. The VAX System V
operating system can only use up to 256 channels.
NOTE
VA X System V is Digital's implementation of the
AT&T UNIX™ System V operating system running
on specific VAX processors. It is intended exclusively
for the telecommunications industry and distribution
is restricted to specific accounts.
The· gateway has two high-speed serial ports. One port supports a full-duplex fiber optic link to a Datakit
ves. This connection supports the AT&T Computer Port Module-High Speed (CPM-HS) interface with A
and B levels of the Datakit VCS protocol. The second port supports an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface
connection to a Digital Network Interface (NI) port.
Using the DECxpress 100 gateway, VAX systems running on either the VMS operating system or the VAX
System V operating system can communicate with:
•

VAX systems on other Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 networks connected in the same manner to the
Datakit network and running the same operating system

•

Terminals connected to the Datakit network by way of asynchronous ports such as terminal port
modules (TPM)

•

Datakit network by way of a CPM-HS device

Datakit and ves are trademarks of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
UNIX is a registered trademark of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company.

DECxpress 100-1

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

DECxpress 100 Gateway

~DmDamD

FRONT VIEW

••••••••
REAR VIEW
CS-7479

Figure 1 DECxpress 100 Gateway

DECxpress 100-2

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
DECxpress 100 Gateway Optioos
The DECxpress 100 gateway is available in two option numbers; one for the VMS operating system, and one
for the VAX System V operating system. The two DECxpress 100 gateway options and the contents of each
are listed below.
The VMS version of the DECxpress 100 gateway (DEDKS-AA) consists of:
•

DECxpress 100 gateway hardware

DEFAT-A A

•

DECxpress 100 VMS Client Distribution Kit

QA-VXCAA-HM

DECxpress 100 VMS Client Software System Manager's Guide

AA-NA42A-TE

DECxpress JOO VMS Client Software Installation Manual

AA-NF25A-TE

VMS client software (includes gateway software)
SPD 29.69.01
•

QL-VXCA9-AA

Single use VMS client license

The VAX System V version of the DECxpress 100 gateway (DEDKS-BA) consists of:
•

DECxpress 100 gateway hardware

DEFAT-AA

•

DECxpress 100 VAX System V Client Distribution Kit

QA-VZ6AA-HM"

The Data Game: A Tutorial for Learning Datakit VCS
Multiplexed Host Interface Commands

AA-NF27A-TE

Datakit VCS Multiplexed Host Interface Software and
DECxpress JOO Gateway Software Installation & System
Administration Manual

AA-NF26A-TE

VAX System V client software (includes gateway software)
SPD 31.50.00
•

Single use VAX System V client license

DECxpress 100-3

QL-VZ6A9-AA

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECxpress 100 gateway.

•

DECxpress 100 Gateway Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DKI00-IN

•

DECxpress 100 Gateway VMS Documentation Kit

QA-VXCAA-GZ

•

DECxpress 100 VMS Client Software System Manager's Guide

AA-NA42A-TE

DECxpress 100 VMS Client Software Installation Manual

AA-NF25A-TE

VMS client and gateway software

SPD 29.69.01

DECxpress 100 Gateway VAX System V Documentation Kit

QA-VZ6AA-GZ

The Data Game: A Tutorial for Learning Datakit VCS
Multiplexed Host Interface Commands

AA-NF27A-TE

Datakit VCS Multiplexed Host Interface Software and
DECxpress 100 Gateway Software Installation & System
Administration Manual

AA-NF26A-TE

DECxpress 100 VAX System V client and gateway software

SPD 31.50.00

Configuration
The DECxpress 100 gateway is supported in both VMS and VAX System V operating system environments. Configuration rules are operating system dependent. In both environments the DECxpress 100
gateway performs the same function. It provides connections between the Datakit network and a VAX
processor running VMS or VAX System V, allowing terminals directly connected to the Datakit network to
connect to either type of node. Connections between nodes must be from one VMS node to another VMS
node, or from one VAX System V node to another VAX System V node. These connections are transparent
to both users and hosts.
Configuration rules for the VMS operating system (Figure 2) are as follows:
•

A single DECxpress 100 gateway can support multiple VMS systems connected to a common
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN.

•

The VMS client software communicates with a single DECxpress 100 gateway.

Configuration rules for the VAX System V operating system (Figure 3) are as follows:
•

A single DECxpress 100 gateway can support only one VAX System V system connected to a
common Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN.

•

The VA.x System V client software can communicate with two DECxpress 100 gateways if they
are on separate Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LANs.

DECxpress 100-4

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

TERMINAL

CPM-HS

TY12

Datakit

VCS

Datakit

VCS

CPM-HS

FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTION
DECxpress·1 00
GATEWAY

MKV89-0336

Figure 2

DECxpress 100 Gateway in a VMS Operating System Configuration

DECxpres!; 100-5

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

VAX SYSTEM V

ETHERNET/
IEEE 802.3

LAN 3

TERMINAL

OECxpress 100
GATEWAY
FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTION
CPM-HS

TY12

Datakit

VCS

Datakit
VCS
CPM-HS

CPM-HS
FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTION

FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTION
OECxpress·1 00
GATEWAY

ETHERNET/
IEEE 802.3

LAN2

MKV89·0300

Figure 3

DECxpress 100 Gateway in a VAX System V Operating System Configuration

DECxpress 100-6

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The DECxpress 100 gateway shipment consists of the items shown in Figure 4.

POWER CORD
DOCUMENTATION:
DECxpress 100 GATEWAY
INSTALLATION/
OWNER'S MANUAL

(EK-DK100-IN)

ETHERNET LOOPBACK CONNECTOR

(12-22196-01 )

FIBER OPTIC LOOPBACK CABLE

(17-02019-01 )

RACK MOUNT KIT:

TWO RACK MOUNT BRACKETS
FOUR 10-32 X 1/2 IN.
TRUSS-HEAD SCREWS
SIX 6-32 X 5/16 IN.
ROUND-HEAD SCREWS
FOUR RETAINER NUTS
MKV89-0331

Figure 4

DECxpress 100 Gateway Components

DECxpress 100-7

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
Software Components
The DECxpress 100 gateway is supported in both VMS and VAX System V operating system environments. There is only one version of the loadable gateway microcode. The loadable gateway microcode and the
client software (either VMS or VAX System V) will be included together in a single distribution kit specific
to the host operating system.

Equipment Placement
The DECxpress 100 gateway can be located in a variety of environments as long as the environmental
requirements are met. The gateway can be either rack mounted in a standard 19-inch RETMA (Radio
Electronics Television Manufacturers Association) rack cabinet or placed on a table (provided the location is
at least 45 cm (18 in.) above the floor). Space must be allowed for proper ventilation and maintenance.

Environmental Requirements
Operating Temperature
Operating Relative Humidity
( noncondensing)

10°C (50°F) to 40°C (104°F)
10% to 90%

Physical Dimensions
With Plastic Covers
16.2 cm (6.4 in.)
49.4 cm (19.4 in.)
31.3 cm (12.3 in.)
7.3 kg (16 lbs)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Without Plastic Covers
13.3 cm (5.3 in.)
43.6 cm (17.2 in.)
29.8 cm (11.7 in.)
5.2 kg (11.5 lbs)

Power Requirements
The DECxpress 100 gateway operates on either 120 Vac, 60 Hz or 240 Vac, 50 Hz (switch selectable).
Maximum power consumption is 240 W. Typical power consumption is approximately 100 W.

Maximum Heat Dissipation
275 BTU/hr

Site Preparation Considerations
This section identifies the things that must be accomplished prior to the installation of the DECxpress 100
gateway.

Arranging for Software Installation - Before the gateway can be fully operational, the software must be
loaded into the host computer system. The software and its documentation are shipped in a separate kit that
is operating system dependent (VMS or VAX System V).
Perform the following steps to arrange for software installation:
1.

Locate the serial number and the Ethernet address on the rear panel of the gateway. These are
on separate labels (Figure 5).

Fill in the information requested on the DECxpress 100 Identification Card (Figure 6) which
is located in the back of the DECxpress 100 Gateway Installation/Owner's Manual
(EK-DK 100-IN).

DECxpress 100-8

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
3.

Give the identification card and any software received to the person responsible for software
installation.

Ask to be notified when the software is installed on the load host(s) and when the gateway is
configured in the load host database, if this is required by the load host(s).

DIll

I~~==~~--~--------------I
i

SERIAL NUMBER

••••••••

f§~~1

REAR PANEL

,,------------_.,

I 1I!1"~J~~6-AA

ETHERNET
ADDRESS
CS·7485

Figure 5 Serial Number and Ethernet Address Label Locations

DECxpress 100-9

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

DECxpress™ 100 Gateway
Identification Card
The serial number and Ethernet address uniquely identify your DECxpress 100 hardware
unit. Please copy the information from your hardware unit onto this card. Include your
name, the date of installation, and the location (for example, office number, building,
floor) of the hardware unit. You should then give this card to your system/network
manager at the same time as you hand over the software carton.
Serial
number
Ethernet
address
Location

lois HD 10 H.".lo HolD H /I~ HA 141
7l1Jt:J If(

s. SHirK

Your name --~~~~~--------------

~
Figure 6

Date.-!.. /18/S1

~----CS·7486

DECxpress 100 Gateway Identification Card

Checking the Site - Check the following items to ensure that the site is prepared for the DECxpress 100
gateway installation.
1.

The appropriate baseband network interface (for example; an Etherjack junction box, DELNI,
DESTA, or Ethernet transceiver) is installed, and the required transceiver cabling is installed,
tested, and tagged.

Fiber optic cables are installed, tested, tagged, and terminated with protective caps.

The ac power outlet matches the power requirements of the gateway and is within 1.8 m (6 ft) of
the gateway location.

The environmental requirements are met.

The space is adequate for ventilation and for maintenance access.

The location is at least 45 em (18 in.) above the floor.

DECxpress 100-10

OECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

Initializing the Gateway in the System
Before initializing the gateway, ensure that the distribution software is installed on the load host(s). Also
ensure that the gateway is configured in the load host database, if this is required by the load host(s). This
can be confirmed by the system manager.

NOfE
If the distribution software is not installed, the load
host cannot send the gateway image to the gateway.
The gateway does not operate without software.
To initialize the gateway in the system, proceed as follows:
1.

With the gateway plugged in and power applied, press the Reset switch (Figure 12).

NOfE
Initialization of the gateway can be initiated by
unplugging the gateway and plugging it back in, manually by pressing the Reset switch, or remotely via the
software.
2.

Observe that the green self-test indicator lights in approximately 30 seconds. If the self-test
indicator does not light, record the numbers of the status indicators (Dl through D8) that are ON
and refer to the MAINTENANCE AIDS section.

Shortly afterwards the status indicator D 1 starts blinking to indicate that the software is loading.
When the software is loaded, Dl remains ON.

If the gateway passes the self-test but D I does not indicate that the software is loading, check
with the system manager to ensure that:
a.

The gateway software has been installed in the host system

The host system knows the correct Ethernet address for the gateway

There is no problem with the operation of the Datakit YCS

DECxpress 100-11

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
Hardware Installation Flow Diagram

OET DECxpr ... GATEWAY
INSTALLATION INFORMATION
FROM THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK, SYSTEM,
OR SERVER)

VERIFY THAT THE SITE
PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS
ARE MET

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS OF
THE DECxpr.es GATEWAY
BOX (SEE FIGURE 4)

FASTEN THE MOUNTING
BRACKETS TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE G)

Figure 7

Hardware Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DECxpress 100-12

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

7
PEEL OFF THE VOLTAGE
LABEL AND VERIFY THAT
THE AC VOLTAGE SELECT
SWITCH IS SET CORRECTLY
(SEE FIGURE 10)

!
REMOVE AND SAVE THE TWO
PROTECTIVE CAPS ON THE
FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
(SEE FIGURE 11)

!
CAREFULL Y CONNECT THE
FIBER OPTIC LOOPBACK
CABLE TO THE FIBER
OPTIC CONNECTORS
(SEE FIGURE 11)

~
PLUG THE ETHERNET LOOPBACK CONNECTOR INTO THE
ETHERNET CONNECTOR
(SEE FIGURE 11)

~
SET THE CONTINUOUS SELFTEST FUNCTION SWITCH 1
AND THE EXTERNAL FIBER
OPTIC LOOPBACK FUNCTION
SWITCH 2 TO THE 1 (UP)
POSITION (SEE FIGURE 12)

~
CONNECT THE AC POWER
CORD TO THE GATEWAY AND
THEN TO THE WALL OUTLET

--{

CAUTION:
ENSURE THAT THE OUTLET VOLTAGE
MATCHES THE AC VOLTAGE SELECT
SWITCH SETTING ON THE GATEWAY.
AN INCORRECT VOLTAGE SETTING
CAN DAMAGE THE GATEWAY.

Figure 7 Hardware Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DECxpress 100-13

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

NO
GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION (SEE FIGURE 15)

YES

SET FUNCTION SWITCHES 1
AND 2 TO THE DOWN (0)
POSITION

DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET
LOOPBACK CONNECTOR AND
THE FIBER OPTIC LOOPBACK
CABLE

CONNECT THE TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO THE ETHERNET
CONNECTOR ON THE
GATEWAY (SEE FIGURE 13)

CONNECT THE FIBER OPTIC
CABLES FROM THE
Dataklt VCS TO THE FIBER
OPTIC CONNECTORS ON
THE GATEWAY (SEE FIGURE 14)

Figure 7 Hardware Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DECxpress 100-14

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

INITIATE SELF-TEST BY
PRESSING THE RESET SWITCH
(SEE FIGURE 12)

GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION (SEE FIGURE 15)

NETWORK PROBLEM
(SEE SYSTEM MANAGER)

INSTALLATION COMPLETE
AND OPERATION VE'1IFIED

Figure 7 Hardware Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DECxpress 100-15

DEC"press 100 INSTALLATION

~
I

REMOVE FOUR SHORT SCREWS

~.--- REMOVE FOUR

LONG SCREWS

REMOVE FOUR
RUBBER FEET
BOTTOM COVER

GATEWAY METAL COVER

TWO SIDE COVERS

TOP COVER

GATEWAY UPSIDE DOWN
CS-7512

Figure 8

Removing the Plastic Covers

DECxpress 100-16

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

MOUNTING BRACKETS

~E"'''''

~' ",,,''-~
-----_-'"-1, I "
"~

SIX 6-32 X 5/16 SCREWS - - -_ _ _ _ _ _~
..~

[

RETA~ER NUT

r~:~\
~

RAIL

TYPICAL VIEW

FOUR 10-32 Xl /2 IN.
TRUSS-HEAD SCREWS

MKV89·0332

Figure 9 Rackmount Installation

DECxpress 100-17

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION
AC VOLTAGE
SELECT SWITCH

e===~
AC POWER
CONNECTOR

r6 ~

U 0 0')
0

.... ....

!'c,~~· I
It

FOR 100/120V OPERATION:

SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "'20V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

FOR 220/240V OPERATION:

SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

I~"

MKV89·0333

Figure 10

Verifying the AC Voltage Select Switch Setting

DECxpress 100-18

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

ER OPTIC CONNECTORS

FIBER OPTIC
LOOPBACK
CABLE
ETHERNET
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR

ETHERNET CONNECTOR
CS-7490

Figure 11

Connecting the Loopback Connector and Cable

DECxpress 100-19

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

NON-MUTE INDICATOR

-® RECEIVER
FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR

C~ TRANSMITTER
FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR

AC POWER
CONNECTOR
USELF-TEST
INDICATOR

DODD
MSB

DODD

STATUS INDICATORS

LSB

FUNCTION SWITCH ES
SHOWN IN DOWN (0).
NORMAL OPERATING
POSITION.
MKV89-0334

Figure 12

DECxpress 100 Gateway Controls, Indicators., and Connectors

DECxpress 100-20

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

Table 1 DECxpress 100 Function Switches
Switch Number

Function

1 (Continuous
Self-test)

When set to 0 (down) and the ac power cord is plugged in or the Reset
switch is pressed, the gateway runs its self-test and then requests the host
computer to down-line load the operating software.
When set to 1 (up) and the ac power cord is plugged in or the Reset switch
is pressed, the gateway continuously runs its self-test without requesting a
down-line load of the software. The self-test only halts on an error
condition.

2* (External Fiber
Optic Port
Loopback)

When set to 0 (down), causes the gateway to loopback internally between
the fiber optic transmitter and receiver ports.
When set to 1 (up), the gateway is set up to loopback externally over a
connection between the transmitter and receiver fiber optic ports.
When the gateway is not in self-test, the fiber optic ports are activated for
normal communication.

This switch is reserved and should be left in the 0 (down) position.

* Switch 2 is effective only when the gateway is performing its self-test.

DECxpress 100-21

DECxpress 100 INSTALLATION

Table 2 DECxpress 100 Indicators
Indicator

Function

Self-Test

A green indicator that lights when the gateway passes its self-test. This indicator
remains lit until power is disconnected or the gateway detects a failure. This
indicator is not lit while self-test is in progress.
When a failure is detected, the self-test indicator goes out and the status indicators
display an error code indicating the failure.

Non-Mute

A green indicator that lights when the fiber optic receiver is receiving information
from the Datakit YCS. This is a non-mute condition.
When not lit, it indicates that information is not being received. This is a mute
condition.

Status

Red indicators (Dl through D8) that provide dynamic status information (listed
below) during normal operation, and static error information if the gateway detects
a failure (Table 4).

When not lit, indicates that the software is not loaded.
When blinking, indicates that the software is being loaded from the host.
When lit, indicates that the software is loaded and ready to connect clients.

Lights when the Datakit Common Signaling Channel (CSC) is operational.

Lights when at least one client is connected.

Lights when at least one channel other than the CSC channel is operational.

D5 through D8*

These indicators show the relative number of clients (traffic) being handled by the
gateway as described below.
•

When D8 is lit, there is a low amount of traffic.

•

When D8 and D7 are lit, there is a moderate amount of traffic.

•

When D8, D7, and D6 are lit, there is heavy traffic.

•

When D8, D7, D6, and D5 are lit, the gateway is operating near capacity.

* These four indicators also show that the gateway is operational by blinking approximately every two
seconds.

DECxpress 100-22

DECxpress 100 CABLING
Cable Configuration Rules
Ensure that the transceiver cables, device cables, and the gateway power cord do not exceed the maximum
lengths as shown in Table 3 and in the following configuration rules.
Table 3

Maximum Cable Lengths

From

Transceiver

Cable Length
(Maximum)

Cable Type

Gateway

50 m (164 ft)
(See rules 1 and 2)

IEEE 802.3 compliant transceiver cable

Datakit VCS

Gateway

1 km (3281 ft)
(See rule 3)

62.5/125 fiber optic pair with
STTM connectors

Wall outlet

Gateway

1.8 m (6 ft)

110/120 volt power cord

ST is a registered trademark of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company.

The basic cable configuration rules are as follows:
1.

The maximum length of the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 meters (164 feet). This maximum length, however, is reduced by the internal cabling equivalency of a device (such as a
DELNI) connected between the gateway and the transceiver, or by the use of office transceiver
cable.
Cabling equivalency is a measure of the internal timing delay of a device, expressed in meters of
transceiver cable. This cabling equivalency must be subtracted from the 50 meter maximum
length. For example, if the device has a 5 meter cabling equivalency, then its maximum allowable
transceiver cable length is 45 meters (50 m - 5 m).

When connecting the gateway to a configuration that includes a DELNI, allow a 5 meter
equivalency loss for the DELNI.

The gateway only accepts 62.5/125 micron fiber optic cables with ST-type connectors.

Cable Connections
This section provides information on connecting the transceiver cable and the fiber optic cables to the
gateway.
Connecting the Transceiver Cable - The transceiver cable connects the gateway Ethernet connector to one of
the following devices:
•
•
•
•

Etherjack junction box
DELNI
Ethernet transceiver
DESTA ThinWire Ethernet station adapter

To connect the transceiver cable to the gateway Ethernet connector, refer to Figure 13.

DECxpress 100-23

DECxpress 100 CABLING

UNLOCK

SLIDE LATCH

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

~TRANSCEIVER CABLE

(RIGHT ANGLE CONNECTOR SHOWN)

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

• • • LOCK

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV89-0335

Figure 13

Connecting the Transceiver Cable

DECxpress 100-24

DECxpress 100 CABLING
Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables - Connect the fiber optic cables to the gateway fiber optic connectors by
referring to Figure 14.
WARNING
Never look into the fiber optic coonectors or cables.
High intensity light can cause eye damage.
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the fiber optic cables, ensure
that the cable bends have a minimum radius of
15.24 cm (6 in.).

CS-7495

Figure 14

Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables

DECxpress 100-25

DECxpress 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Self-Test
The DECxpress 100 gateway has an internal ROM based self-test. The self-test exercises all of the
functional areas of the gateway. If the fiber optic loopback connector is present, and Function Switch 2 is in
the up position, the gateway self-test will check the transmit and receive capabilities of the fiber optic
interface port.
The self-test is initiated by either pressing the Reset switch, or unplugging and then plugging the gateway
power cord into the ac outlet. After approximately 30 seconds the green self-test indicator should light, and
shortly afterwards, the red D 1 status indicator should start blinking and then stay lit to indicate that the
software has been loaded and the gateway is on-line. If the self-test fails, the red status indicators will display
an error code. The error codes and corrective actions are listed in Table 4.

Table 4

Self-Test Error Codes

Error Code (hex)

Indication

Corrective Action

00-07

Reserved

NIA

08-12

JLVAX CPU Error

Replace CPU INI Module

RAM Controller Error

Replace CPU INI Module

ROM Error

Replace CPU INI Module

Status Register Error

Replace CPU INI Module

Station Address Error

Replace CPU INI Module

17-20

JLDMA Controller Error

Replace CPU INI Module

21-28

I/O Memory Error

Replace CPU INI Module

29-30

VIC Error

Replace CPU INI Module

31-35

RAM Error

Replace CPU INI Module

36-45

Clance Error

Replace CPU INI Module

46-6A

SSC Error

Replace CPU INI Module

80-B3

CPM Subsystem Error

Replace FPM-HS Protocol Module

DECxpress 100-26

DECxpress 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troobleshooting Flowchart
Use the flowchart in Figure 15 to help identify and correct problems in the DECxpress 100 gateway.
NOTE
Prior to starting any troubieshootill2 activity, notify
"he Oatakit ves system manager.

8Y8TEM MANAQER
HAS DETERMINED
THAT PROBLEM 18
IN QATEWAY

YES

Figure 15 DECxpress 100 Gateway Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 4)

DECxpress 100-27

DECxpress 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

STOP

Figure 15

DECxpress 100 Gateway Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 4)

DECxpress 100-28

DECxpress 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

A DIRTY LOOPBAC}
CABLE WILL GIVE A
_
FALSE INDICATION
(SEE NOTE)

NOTE:
USE LINT-FREE CLOTH DAMPENED WITH
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL TO CLEAN TIPS OF
FIBER OPTIC CABLE.

Figure 15

DECxpress 100 Gateway Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 4)

DECxpress 100-29

DECxp..ess 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

STATUSINDIOATOR}
D1. D3. AND D7
ARE LIT.·n HEX

Figure 15

DECxpress 100 Gateway Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 4)

DECxpress 100-30

DECxpress 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 16 shows the field replaceable units (FRUs) of the DECxpress 100 gateway. The FRUs and their part
numbers are listed below.
FRU

Part Number

Fan Assembly
FPM-HS Protocol Module
CPU INI Module
Power Supply
AC Wire Harness
Voltage Selection Switch
Breaker,4 A, 250 V

70-25518-01
54-18699-01
54-18697 -01
H7859-A
17-01971-01
17-16901-04
12-19912-02
WARNING
The removal and replacement procedures should be
performed by qualified service personnel only. DO
NOT attempt to remove any FRU while the DECxpress 100 gateway is connected to a power source.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage electrical components.
Use a grounded wriststrap (29-11762-00) and a
grounded work surface when accessing any internal
components of the DECxpress 100 gateway.

DECxpress 100-31

DECxpress 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

ASSEMBLY

FAN BRACKET*
ASSEMBLY

METAL BASE
ASSEMBLY
~~~~--FPM-HS PROTOCOL

MODULE*
CPU/NI MODULE*
TWO SIDE COVERS

BOTTOM COVE R
* FIELD REPLACEABLE UNIT
CS-7S16

Figure 16

DECxpress 100 Gateway FRU Locations

DECxpress 100-32

Communications Options Minireference Manual
Volume 6 Ethernet Devices (Part 2)
EK-CMIV6-RM-005

READER'S COMMENTS
Your comments and suggestions will help us in our efforts to improve the quality of our publications.
1.

How did you use this manual? (Circle your response.)
(a) Installation
(b) Operation/use

(e) Training
(f) Other (Please specify.) _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Did the manual meet your needs? Yes 0

Please rate the manual on the following categories. (Circle your response.)
Accuracy
Clarity
Completeness
Table of Contents, Index
Illustrations, examples
Overall ease of use

No 0

Why?

Excellent
5
5
5
5
5
5

Good
4
4
4
4
4
4

Fair
3
3
3
3
3
3

Poor
2
2
2
2
2
2

Unacceptable
1
1
1

What things did you like most about this manual?

What things did you like least about this manual? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Please list and describe any errors you found in the manual.
Page

Description/Location of Error

Name ___________________

Job Title _________________

Street _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____

Company _________________

City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Department _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

State/Country _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Telephone Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Postal (ZIP) Code

Date

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS.
Please do not use this form to order manuals. Contact your representative at Digital Equipment Corporation
M
or (in the USA) call our DECdirece department at this toll-free number: 800-258-1710.
© 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation.

MKO

FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.

No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 33

MAYNARD, MA

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Educational Services/Quality Assurance
12 Crosby Drive BUO/E08
Bedford. MA 01730-1493
USA

111111111111111111111111111111111 .. 11111111111111111
FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.